Alcatel-Lucent GSM

G2 BTS Hardware Description

BTS Document Sub-System Description Release B10

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

BLANK PAGE BREAK

Status Short title

RELEASED G2 BTS HW. Descr.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent.

2 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

Contents

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 BTS Submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Alphabetical Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Common Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRFU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 SCP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Functional Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 QUICC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 TKBUS Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5 SCP Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 MFP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 MFP Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 DPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.4 MFP Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 TGU Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 TRXMUX Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Time Slot Assigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 Downlink Reformatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.3 Status and Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Encoder Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Decoder Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Demodulator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 Baseband Interface Encryption/Decryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.2 External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.3 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10.5 Electrical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 DRFU Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.3 DRFU Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 G1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 Electrical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 22 25 28 28 28 28 28 29 30 31 31 31 31 32 32 33 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 36 36 37 38 39 39 42 42 42 43 43 43 44 45 47 48 48 48 49 49 49 49 49 50 51 51

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

3 / 288

Contents

FUCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 MFP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 SCP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Interrupt Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 LAPD Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5 Reset and Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6 Token Bus Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 Backplane Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 FICE Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Master Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Channel Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Frequency Hopping Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 Base Station Interface Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.5 Frame Clock Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Internal Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Station Unit Clock Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Clock Driver Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 Internal Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 Base Station Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.6 LAPD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.7 Frequency Hopping Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.4 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5 Backplane Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 DADE Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 ICI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Demodulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Decryption Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.4 Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.5 Arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.6 Watchdog Reset and Clock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.7 Reset Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53 54 56 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 59 59 59 59 59 60 60 61 62 62 63 64 66 66 66 68 68 68 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 70 70 70 70 70 71 71 72 73 76 76 77 78 79 79 80 80 81 82 82 82

4 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

Contents

6.2.8 Clock Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 6.3.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 6.3.2 Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 6.3.3 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 6.3.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 6.4 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 6.4.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 6.4.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 6.4.3 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 6.4.4 Backplane Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 SCFE/SACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 7.2 OMU Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 7.2.1 Microprocessor and Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 7.2.2 Timing and Control Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 7.2.3 Driver Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 7.2.4 Token Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 7.2.5 Asynchronous Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 7.2.6 Base Station Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 7.3 EACU Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 7.3.1 Microcontroller and Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 7.3.2 Input/Output System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 7.3.3 Timing and Control Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 7.3.4 Q1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 7.4 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.4.2 Reset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7.4.3 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7.4.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7.5 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 7.5.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 7.5.2 SCFE Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 7.5.3 SACE Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.5.4 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 7.5.5 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 8.2 STSE Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 8.2.1 Module Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 8.2.2 STSE Master Frequency Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 8.2.3 STSP Master Frequency Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 8.2.4 STSE/STSP Master Clock and Frame Number Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 8.2.5 STSR Master Clock and Frame Number Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 8.2.6 Clock Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 8.2.7 Frequency Hopping Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 8.3 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.3.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.3.2 Trimming Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.3.3 Reset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.3.4 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.3.5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.4 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 8.4.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 8.4.2 STSE Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 8.4.3 STSP/STSR Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 6.3

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

5 / 288

Contents

10

11

8.4.4 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.5 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTED/RTEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.1 RTE Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.2 Functional Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Receiver Board Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Digital Processing Unit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Transmitter Board Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.1 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.3 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.4 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.1 Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Transmitter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.1 Carrier Unit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.2 Power Control and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.4 GMSK Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.5 I/Q Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.6 Upconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.7 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.8 Power Coupling and Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.9 Transmitter Frequency Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 Display States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.3 DCL2 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.4 Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.5 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.6 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.7 Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.3 Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.4 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXDD/RXGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.1 Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.3 Functional Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 ARXE Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 Signal Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.2 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Digital Board Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.1 DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.2 A-D Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 SRXE Board Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115 117 119 120 120 120 121 121 122 122 122 122 123 123 123 124 124 125 126 126 126 127 128 129 129 129 129 129 130 130 130 131 131 132 132 133 134 134 134 135 135 136 136 137 139 140 140 140 141 142 142 142 142 142 142 143

6 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

Contents

12

13

11.4.1 Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.2 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.1 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.3 RF Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.4 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FED8/FEG2/FEG8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.1 RFE Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.2 GSM 900 RFEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.3 GSM 1800 RFEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 RFE Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.1 RF Bandpass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.2 Directional Coupler and Test Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.3 Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.4 Amplifier Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.5 Power Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.6 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 Antenna Diversity Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.1 FEG2/FEG8 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.2 FED8 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.3 Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.2 Front Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.3 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.4 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 TMAD/TMAG Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.1 Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.2 Band Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.3 Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.4 Pilot Tone Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.5 Pilot Tone Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.6 Low Noise Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.7 Remote DC Feed T-Junction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.8 DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.9 Overvoltage Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.10 Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 RMCD/RMCG Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.1 Overvoltage/Lightning Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.2 Remote DC Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.3 Continuously Variable Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.4 Pilot Tone Detector 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.5 Test Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.6 Amplification Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.7 Pilot Tone Detector 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.8 One-to-Eight Power Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

143 143 143 143 143 144 144 145 145 146 147 148 148 148 148 149 149 149 150 150 150 150 151 151 151 152 152 152 152 154 154 155 157 158 159 160 161 161 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 163 164 165 165 165 165 166 166 166 166

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

7 / 288

Contents

14

15

13.3.9 Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.10 Band Pass Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.11 Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.3 Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.4 Special Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 TMAD/TMAG Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.1 Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.2 Front and Side Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.3 RF Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 RMCD/RMCG Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.3 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.1 GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.2 GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.3 Logical Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 RTC Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.1 Forem GSM 1800 RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.2 Forem GSM RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.3 Celwave GSM RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.4 Celwave GSM 1800 RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.5 BCCH-Carrier Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.6 Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.7 Cavity Block and Cable Harness/Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 Forem RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.1 Transmit Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.2 Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.3 Microcontrollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.4 DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 Celwave RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.1 Transmit Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.2 VSWR Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.3 Motherboard/Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 GSM RTC Extension/Modularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6 Adjustments and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.1 Initial Cavity Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.2 Operational Periodic Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7.3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7.4 Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1 WBC Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.2 DUPG/DUPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.3 DUD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.4 WBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

166 166 166 167 167 168 168 169 170 170 171 171 172 172 173 174 175 176 176 176 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 182 182 183 183 183 184 184 185 185 185 185 186 186 186 186 187 187 187 187 188 189 189 197 199 200 200 200 201 202

8 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

Contents

16

17

15.1.5 DUPD/DUPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.6 DUD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 WBC Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.1 Isolator with Power Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.2 Summing Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.3 Transmitter Module (WBC and DUD2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.4 Transmit-Receive Module (DUPD/DUPG/DUD2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.5 Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.6 Control Board (DUD2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3 Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.2 Front Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.3 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.4 Rear Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2 Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Communications ADPS Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.1 Common Mode Choke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.2 AC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.3 Power Factor and Switch-on Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.4 Battery Inhibit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.5 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.6 DC/DC Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.7 Capacitor-Choke-Capacitor Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.8 Inhibit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.9 Output Voltage Monitor and Alarm Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3 Alcatel-Lucent Converters ADPS Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.1 Input Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.2 Inrush Current Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.3 AC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.4 DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.5 Output Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.6 Converter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.7 Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.8 Output Voltage/Current Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.9 Output Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.10 Undervoltage for AC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.11 Power Fail Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.3 Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5.3 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MBPS/FCPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 DC/DC Power Supplies Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.1 MBPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.2 FCPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.3 Input Filter and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

203 204 205 205 205 206 206 207 207 208 208 209 209 210 210 210 212 213 215 216 217 217 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 219 220 220 220 220 220 220 221 221 221 221 221 222 222 222 223 223 224 224 225 227 228 228 229 230 231

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

9 / 288

Contents

18

19

17.2.4 Auxiliary and Monitor Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.5 DC/DC Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.6 Output Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.3 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.4 FCPS Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.5 MBPS Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.6 Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.7 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.8 Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4.2 MBPS Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4.3 MBPS Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4.4 FCPS Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4.5 FCPS Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.1 Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.2 Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6.1 Low Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6.2 High Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6.3 Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7 ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.3 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 DCDB Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.1 Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.2 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.3 Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.1 Mini-BTS with Two Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.2 BTS with up to Eight Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.3 Indoor Sectorized BTS with 3 x 2 Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.4 Outdoor Sectorized BTS with 3 x 2 Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMBI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2 SMBI Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.1 Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.2 G.703 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.3 Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.4 Central Clock Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.5 Framer/G.704 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.6 PCM Time Slot Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.7 Bit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.8 Microcontroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

231 231 232 233 233 233 233 234 234 235 235 235 236 236 237 238 239 240 241 241 241 242 242 242 242 243 245 246 246 246 246 247 247 247 247 248 248 249 250 251 252 252 253 255 256 257 257 258 258 258 258 258 259 260 260 261

10 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

Contents

20

21

22

19.3.2 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.4 DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.5 Abis Interface Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.4 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CFU1/CFUA/CFUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1.1 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1.3 Typical Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2 Functional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2.1 Fans and Speed Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2.2 DC/DC Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2.3 Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.4 CFU1 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.4.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.4.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.5 CFUT Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.5.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.5.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.6 CFUA Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.6.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.6.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 O&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.1 External Alarm Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.2 Q1 Test Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.3 Jumper Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3.2 Front and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3.3 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3.4 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUDP/FUDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2 CUDP Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3 FUDP Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

262 262 262 263 264 264 265 266 267 269 270 270 271 271 273 273 273 273 274 274 274 274 274 275 276 276 277 278 278 278 279 280 280 280 280 280 281 281 282 283 283 285 286 286 287 288 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

11 / 288

Figures

Figures
Figure 1: DRFU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Figure 2: DRFU Front Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Figure 3: DRFU Side View Showing the Position of the DFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Figure 4: DRFE Front Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Figure 5: FUCO Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Figure 6: FUCO Front Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Figure 7: FUCO Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Figure 8: FICE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Figure 9: Channel Encoder Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Figure 10: FICE Front Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Figure 11: FICE Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Figure 12: DADE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Figure 13: DADE Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Figure 14: DADE Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Figure 15: OMU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Figure 16: EACU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Figure 17: SCFE Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Figure 18: SACE Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Figure 19: SCFE/SACE Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Figure 20: STSE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Figure 21: STSE Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Figure 22: STSP/STSR Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Figure 23: STSE Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Figure 24: RTE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Figure 25: RTE Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Figure 26: RTE Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Figure 27: Transmitter Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Figure 28: Transmitter Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Figure 29: Transmitter Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Figure 30: Receiver Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Figure 31: Receiver Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Figure 32: Receiver Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Figure 33: FED8 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Figure 34: FEG2 and FEG8 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Figure 35: FEG2 Front Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Figure 36: FEG8 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Figure 37: FED8 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 38: RFE Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Figure 39: Antenna Pre-amplifier Logical Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

12 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

Figures

Figure 40: Tower Mounted Amplifier Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Figure 41: Receiver Multicoupler Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Figure 42: Tower Mounted Amplifier Front and Side Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Figure 43: Receiver Multicoupler Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Figure 44: Receiver Multicoupler Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Figure 45: RTC Logical Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Figure 46: Forem RC4D/RC8D Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Figure 47: FRBG/FREG Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Figure 48: CRBG/CREG Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Figure 49: Celwave RC4D/RC8D Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Figure 50: FRBG Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Figure 51: FRBG Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Figure 52: FREG Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Figure 53: FREG Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Figure 54: Forem RC4D Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Figure 55: Forem RC8D Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Figure 56: Forem RC4D/RC8D Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Figure 57: CRBG Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Figure 58: CRBG Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Figure 59: CREG Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Figure 60: CREG Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Figure 61: Celwave RC4D Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Figure 62: Celwave RC8D Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Figure 63: Celwave RC4D/RC8D Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Figure 64: WBC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Figure 65: DUPD/DUPG Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Figure 66: DUD2 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Figure 67: Forem WBC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Figure 68: Celwave WBC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Figure 69: DUPD Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Figure 70: DUD2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Figure 71: DUPG Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Figure 72: WBC/DUPD Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Figure 73: DUD2 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Figure 74: DUPG Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Figure 75: Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Communications ADPS Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Figure 76: Alcatel-Lucent Converters ADPS Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Figure 77: ADPS Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Figure 78: ADPS Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Figure 79: MBPS Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

13 / 288

Figures

Figure 80: FCPS Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Figure 81: MBPS Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Figure 82: MBPS Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Figure 83: FCPS Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Figure 84: FCPS Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Figure 85: DCDB in a Mini-BTS with Two Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Figure 86: DCDB in a Mini-BTS with Two Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Figure 87: DCDB in a BTS with up to Eight Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Figure 88: DCDB in a Sectorized Indoor BTS with 3 x 2 Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Figure 89: DCDB in a Sectorized Outdoor BTS with 3 x 2 Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Figure 90: DCDB Equipment Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Figure 91: SMBI Logical Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Figure 92: SMBI Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Figure 93: Typical Abis Interface to BSI Mapping at a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Figure 94: Abis Interface Impedance Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Figure 95: SMBI Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Figure 96: SMBI Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Figure 97: CFU1, CFUT, CFUA and Temperature Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Figure 98: CFU1 and CFUT/CFUA Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Figure 99: CFU1 Mechanical Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Figure 100: CFUT Mechanical Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Figure 101: CFUA Mechanical Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Figure 102: MCIB Front and Side Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Figure 103: Equipped MCIB Rear View Inside the MCI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Figure 104: CUDP Front Panel and Backplane Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Figure 105: FUDP Front Panel and Backplane Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

14 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

Tables

Tables
Table 1: Alphabetical Submodule Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Table 2: SCP Logic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Table 3: DRFU Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Table 4: Status LEDs Y1 - Y4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Table 5: Channel Use Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Table 6: DRFU External Interface Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Table 7: DRFE Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Table 8: DRFE Electrical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Table 9: DRFE Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Table 10: FUCO Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Table 11: FUCO Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Table 12: FICE Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Table 13: FICE Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Table 14: FICE Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Table 15: FICE BSIA Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Table 16: FICE BSIB Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Table 17: FICE BSSTE Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Table 18: FICE FHI/FUTA Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Table 19: Arbiter-generated Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Table 20: Arbiter-generated Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Table 21: DADE Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Table 22: DADE Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Table 23: SCFE Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Table 24: OMU Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Table 25: EACU LEDs Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Table 26: SCFE/SACE Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Table 27: SCFE Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Table 28: SCFE MMI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Table 29: SACE MMI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Table 30: SCFE/SACE EAC Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Table 31: STSE Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Table 32: STSE/STSP/STSR Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Table 33: STSE Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Table 34: STSE MMI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Table 35: STSE TEST Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Table 36: STSE CLK IN Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Table 37: RTE Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Table 38: Transmitter Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Table 39: Transmitter Display States During Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

15 / 288

Tables

Table 40: Transmitter Initialization Fatal Error Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Table 41: DCL2 Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Table 42: Normal Operation Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Table 43: Transmitter Output Powers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Table 44: Transmitter Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Table 45: Receiver Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Table 46: RFE Alarm Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Table 47: RFE Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Table 48: RFE Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Table 49: RFE Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Table 50: RFE Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Table 51: Antenna Pre-amplifier Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Table 52: Antenna Pre-amplifier Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Table 53: RMCD/RMCG Alarm and Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Table 54: Receiver Multicoupler/Tower Mounted Amplifier Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Table 55: Tower Mounted Amplifier Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Table 56: Receiver Multicoupler Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Table 57: RTC LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Table 58: RTC Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Table 59: RTC Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Table 60: FRBG/CRBG/RC4D/RC8D RS-232 Front Panel Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Table 61: WBC LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Table 62: WBC Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Table 63: WBC Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Table 64: ADPS LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Table 65: ADPS Basic Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Table 66: ADPS Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Table 67: ADPS Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Table 68: Power Supply LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Table 69: FCPS Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Table 70: Additional MBPS Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Table 71: MBPS/FCPS Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Table 72: DC/DC Power Supplies Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Table 73: DC/DC Power Supplies Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Table 74: DC/DC Power Supplies EN 55022 Class B Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Table 75: DCDB Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Table 76: LEDs A1/A2 on SMBI in Ring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Table 77: LED A1 on SMBI in Star Configuration or End of Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Table 78: LED A1 on Second SMBI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Table 79: Abis Interface Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

16 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

Tables

Table 80: SMBI Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Table 81: SMBI Front Panel Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Table 82: Cooling Fan Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Table 83: Control Board Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Table 84: CFU1 Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Table 85: CFUT Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Table 86: CFUA Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Table 87: MCIB Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Table 88: Types of Dummy Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 / 288

Tables

18 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

Preface

Preface
Purpose
This document describes the hardware submodules used in the Generation Two family of Base Transceiver Station equipment. This document is applicable to all hardware generations and variants, including both GSM 900 and GSM 1800. GSM 1800 is also known as Digital Cellular System.

Whats New

In Edition 03
Update for new equipment naming.

In Edition 02
Update of system title.

In Edition 01
First oficial release of document.

Audience

This manual is intended for: Commissioning personnel System support engineers Training department (for reference use) Any other personnel interested in the BTS hardware.

Assumed Knowledge

The reader must have a general knowledge of mobile telecommunications systems, terminology and BTS functions.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

19 / 288

Preface

20 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

1 Introduction

1 Introduction
The Introduction contains listings of, and references to, the submodules described in this document. Submodules are listed in both module/functional unit order, and alphabetical order. This chapter also contains general information applicable to all submodules.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

21 / 288

1 Introduction

1.1 BTS Submodules

This document describes the hardware of the G2 BTS submodules, Replaceable Items. These are arranged in the following order: Frame Unit submodules Station Unit submodules Carrier Unit submodules Coupling Unit submodules Miscellaneous submodules. Miscellaneous submodules are those which do not form part of a BTS functional unit. Unit Name Frame Unit Submodule Type Single-Boards Submodule Name DRFU DRFE Three-Boards FUCO FICE DADE Station Unit Control SCFE SACE Timing and Switching STSE STSR STSP Extended Cell Timing ESTS ESTR RTE RTEG RTED Carrier Unit Transmitter TXGM TXGH TXDH Extended Cell Receiver TEGM RXGD RXDD

22 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

1 Introduction

Unit Name Coupling Unit

Submodule Type RFE

Submodule Name FEG2 FEG8 FED8

Receiver Multicoupler

RMCG TMAG RMCD TMAD

RTC

FRBG FREG CRBG CREG RC4D RC8D

WBC

WB1G WB2G WB2D DUD2 DUPG DUPD

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

23 / 288

1 Introduction

Unit Name Miscellaneous

Submodule Type Power Supply

Submodule Name ADPS (AC/DC) MBPS (DC/DC) FCPS (DC/DC)

Power Distribution BIE CFU

DCDB SMBI CFU1 CFUT CFUA

Connection Box Dummy Front Panels

MCIB CUDP FUDP

24 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

1 Introduction

1.2 Alphabetical Listing

The following table alphabetically lists all the indoor BTS submodules, with chapter references. Submodule ADPS CFU1 CFUA CFUT CRBG Reference ADPS (Section 16) CFU1/CFUA/CFUT (Section 20) CFU1/CFUA/CFUT (Section 20) CFU1/CFUA/CFUT (Section 20) CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D (Section 14) CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D (Section 14) CUDP/FUDP (Section 22) 6 DCDB (Section 18) DRFE (Section 3) DRFU (Section 2) WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG (Section 15) WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG (Section 15) WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG (Section 15) STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR (Section 8) STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR (Section 8) MBPS/FCPS (Section 17) FED8/FEG2/FEG8 (Section 12) FED8/FEG2/FEG8 (Section 12) FED8/FEG2/FEG8 (Section 12) FICE (Section 5)

CREG

CUDP DADE DCDB DRFE DRFU DUD2

DUPD

DUPG

ESTR

ESTS

FCPS FED8 FEG2 FEG8 FICE

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

25 / 288

1 Introduction

Submodule FRBG

Reference CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D (Section 14) CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D (Section 14) FUCO (Section 4) CUDP/FUDP (Section 22) MBPS/FCPS (Section 17) MCIB (Section 21) CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D (Section 14) CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D (Section 14) TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG (Section 13) TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG (Section 13) RTED/RTEG (Section 9) RTED/RTEG (Section 9) RXDD/RXGD (Section 11) RXDD/RXGD (Section 11) SCFE/SACE (Section 7) SCFE/SACE (Section 7) SMBI (Section 19) STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR (Section 8) STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR (Section 8) STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR (Section 8) TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM (Section 10) TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG (Section 13)

FREG

FUCO FUDP MBPS MCIB RC4D

RC8D

RMCD

RMCG

RTED RTEG RXDD RXGD SACE SCFE SMBI STSE

STSP

STSR

TEGM

TMAD

26 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

1 Introduction

Submodule TMAG

Reference TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG (Section 13) TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM (Section 10) TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM (Section 10) TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM (Section 10) WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG (Section 15) WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG (Section 15) WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG (Section 15)

TXDH

TXGH

TXGM

WB1G

WB2D

WB2G

Table 1: Alphabetical Submodule Listing

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

27 / 288

1 Introduction

1.3 Common Information

1.3.1 Operating Temperature
This section contains information common to all submodules. The recommended operating temperature range for the BTS submodules is: Minimum temperature: -10
o

C
o

Maximum temperature: +70

C.

1.3.2 Grounding
To ensure through grounding, all frames and front panels etc., are fixed using conductive screws. Conductive lacquers are used where appropriate.

1.3.3 Dimensions
The dimensions of the BTS submodules are usually specified in terms of the following units: U, where 1 U = 44.45 mm T, where 1 T = 5.08 mm.

1.3.4 Standards
G2 BTS equipment complies with the following standards: ETS 300 342-2 EMC for European Digital Cellular Telecommunications Systems GSM recommendation for Base Station equipment 11.20, prETS 300.

28 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

2 DRFU

2 DRFU
This chapter provides a detailed description of the DRFU.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

29 / 288

2 DRFU

2.1 Introduction
The DRFU (Dual Rate Frame Unit) consists of a single plug-in unit. It provides frame-level functionality for G2 BTSs. The DRFU provides the BTS with digital baseband processing for eight time slots on a full-duplex basis. An on-board DC/DC Converter is used to convert the power to 3.3 V, which is required for operation of the DRFU. A supervision circuit disables the DC/DC Converter if the DRFU output falls below 2.8 V for more than one second. It also disables the 5 V supply if the DC/DC Converter fails. The DRFU backplane connector pin-outs are compatible with G2 BTS equipment. However, an adaptor kit is available for operation with Generation One equipment. The DRFU is implemented on G1 BTS equipment with the aid of the DRFE module.
Debug 1 Debug 2 Interface to DRFE Unit (G1) Debug 3 Clock Interfaces

DCL1 Interfaces SCP (G2)

DualPort RAM

MFP

TGU PHYLAC

MML

RSL

ECPL Test Interface DEMAD Frequency Hopping Interfaces

Encoder Base Station Interface TRXMUX Decoder

DEMND

BED

ECPL Entity Control Parallel Link

MML Multiplexer Management Link RSL Radio Signalling Link

DEMAD DEMND

Demodulator Antenna Diversity Demodulator No Diversity

Figure 1: DRFU Block Diagram The DRFU consists of the following functional blocks: SCP MFP TGU TRXMUX Encoder Decoder Demodulator BED.

30 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

2 DRFU

2.2 SCP Functions

The SCP microprocessor is a 32-bit device, with a performance of 20 MIPS.

2.2.1 Functional Entities

The SCP microprocessor provides control over the following DRFU functional entities: Quad Integrated Communication Controller (QUICC) Memory Token Bus Controller SCP Logic. The SCP functional entities are described in the following sections.

2.2.2 QUICC
The QUICC device: Generates chip select signals Controls and refreshes the DRAM Provides watchdog control and supervision. The QUICC also provides the following serial interfaces: Debug 1 and 2 test interfaces Multiplexer Management Link Radio Signalling Link.

2.2.3 Memory
The SCP has the following memory functional-requirements: DRAM DRAM multiplexer Non-volatile memory Dual Port RAM.

2.2.3.1 DRAM
The DRAM is 4 Mbyte in size, organized in 4 x 8 bits (32 bits wide). All the control signals for accessing the DRAM are generated by the QUICC.

2.2.3.2 DRAM Multiplexer

This device is used to generate row and column addresses for the DRAM.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

31 / 288

2 DRFU

2.2.3.3 Non-volatile Memory

The SCP utilizes 2 Mbyte Flash EPROM memory for the storage of program code and data. This is a block erasable, non-volatile memory, which is write protected, with a minimum of 100,000 write/erase cycles per block. The block size is 64 kbyte (6 bits wide).

2.2.3.4 DPR
The DPR is used for high-speed/high-volume communication between the SCP microcontroller and the MFP. The DPR capacity is 2 kbyte (8 bits wide).

2.2.4 TKBUS Controller

The TKBUS Controllers primary function is to prevent data collisions on the SCP busses. It provides control of the Data and Address Bus, Chip Select Bus and the Interrupt Request Bus.

2.2.5 SCP Logic

The SCP logic consists of a single, programmable, logic device (gate array). It provides the majority of the microprocessor support logic. The main SCP logic functions are defined in the following table. Function Bus request logic Definition Arbitrates between the QUICC, TKBUS and the SCP microprocessor to prevent bus collisions. Generates the local clocks and the reset signal for the various SCP functional blocks. The reset function indicates the source of the reset events to the QUICC. Performs the task of multiplexing accesses to the 32-bit SCP microprocessor data bus. Detects interrupts from the QUICC, TKBUS and the MFP. It maps the interrupts to the microprocessor, and provides the interrupt acknowledge signal to the interrupting device. There are ten LED indicators, located on the front panel. The LCR controls LEDs 3 to 10. LEDs 3 to 8 are software controlled and are connected to a write-only register with a master reset function. The LCR also controls the TKBUS relay.

Reset and clock generation

Dynamic Bus Sizer

Interrupt Controller

LED and Control Register

Table 2: SCP Logic Functions

32 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

2 DRFU

2.3 MFP Functions

The MFP consists of the following functional entities: DSP MFP Memory DPR MFP Logic. The MFP functional entities are described in the following sections.

2.3.1 DSP
The MFP main component is a high-speed DSP with a performance of 30 Mips. The DSP is connected to the SCP via the following three bus interfaces: IRQ Bus CS Bus DA Bus. MFP to SCP data transfers are controlled by an interrupt management function, via a connection to the SCPL. The DSP uses its host interface for SCP controlled communication with the SCP processor.

2.3.2 MFP Memory

The MFP uses EPROM and RAM. The DSP firmware is executed from the EPROM, and a 384 kbyte 8-bit RAM is used for data manipulation.

2.3.3 DPR
The DPR is used for high volume data transfer to/from the SCP microprocessor.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

33 / 288

2 DRFU

2.3.4 MFP Logic

The MFP logic provides the DSP support logic. This includes memory chip select, reset signal generation and interrupt priority handling. The MFPL also connects the MFP to the Entity Control Parallel Link. The ECPL provides a parallel connection between the MFP and other DRFU functional entities, such as signalling, control and O&M. The ECPL interfaces the following DRFU functional blocks to the MFP: TGU TRXMUX Encoder Decoder Demodulator BED. Each of the above functions are monitored and controlled by reading status registers and writing to control registers.

2.4 TGU Functions

The TGU provides system clocks and timing signals. The TGU basically consists of a PHYLAC which provides an interface to the MFP and the BTS master clock unit. PHYLAC The PHYLAC generates all internal clocks from a 26 MHz master clock source. It provides the following functionality: Master clock supervision Local clock generation Sequencing of the other MFPU functions. The PHYLAC detects and reports any clock errors to the MFP. It switches between two external links to the master clock unit if an error is detected. The PHYLAC can be programmed for automatic or manual link selection.

34 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

2 DRFU

2.5 TRXMUX Functions

The TRXMUX submultiplexes the Traffic Channel data between the BSI and the Frame Unit functions. RSL channels are transferred transparently. The TRXMUX consists of the functional entities: TCH Time Slot Assigner Downlink Reformatter Status and Control Registers. Each TRXMUX functional entity is described in the following sections.

2.5.1 Time Slot Assigner

The TCH Time Slot Assigner handles the extraction and insertion of TCH data on BSI time slots. The time slots used on the BSI are programmed through two Status and Control configuration registers. The Time Slot Assigner handles the transfer of MML and RSL data between the BSI and SCP: MML data is carried in a 64 kbit/s channel of the BSI Downlink RSL data (from the BSC) is extracted from the BSI and passed to the SCP.

2.5.2 Downlink Reformatter

The Downlink Reformatter provides an interface for downlink TCH data transfer to the Encoder. The data contains eight full-rate or 16 half-rate channels packed into two-bit nibbles. The net TCH data rate is 128 kbit/s (the remaining capacity of the 2 Mbit/s interface is unused). The data is presented through four independent 2 Mbit/s synchronous interfaces, each containing two full-rate or four half-rate channels. The channels are packed into two-bit nibbles and have a net data rate of 32 kbit/s.

2.5.3 Status and Control Registers

The Status and Control function provides a set of TRXMUX control registers, which are accessible via the ECPL.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

35 / 288

2 DRFU

2.6 Encoder Functions

The Encoder encodes the downlink channels. The following functions are included as part of this process: Rate adaptation Channel encoding Fast Associated Control Channel bit stealing Burst building Multi-frame building Burst control (generation of encryption level and power control information). The Encoder hardware contains a single high-speed DSP with a performance of 66 Mips. DSP data manipulation is achieved with 192 kbytes of static RAM organized in 24 bit words (3 x 8 bits). The DSP provides two 2 Mbit/s serial interfaces for the incoming and outgoing TCH data streams. The DSP host interface is used for connection to the ECPL. Reset signals are provided by the MFP.

2.7 Decoder Functions

The Decoder decodes the demodulated and decrypted uplink channels. The following functions are included as part of this process: De-interleaving FACCH detection Convolutional and block decoding Rate adaptation Discontinuous Transmission (mechanism) frame detection Time Alignment Random Access Channel load measurement Uplink quality estimation Idle channel monitoring Filtering of the Time Of Arrival and received signal level Bit Error Rate measurement. The Decoder employs four DSPs with an operating capability of 66 Mips (with 192 kbyte data manipulation RAMs). Serial Interfaces The Decoder has four synchronous serial interfaces connected to the BED. The data rate for each interface is 13 MHz. Each interface carries the demodulated uplink data and frame signalling for one DSP. One DSP provides the processing capability to decode two full-rate TCHs (or four half-rate TCHs). Software running on the DSPs individually decodes the TCHs. The decoded data streams are passed to the TRXMUX using 2 Mbit/s serial interfaces.

36 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

2 DRFU

2.8 Demodulator Functions

The Demodulator demodulates the uplink channels. The following functions are included in this process: Buffering of uplink data Equalization Carrier frequency offset compensation GMSK demodulation TOA estimation Signal-to-Noise Ratio measurement. The Demodulator uses two DSPs with an operating capability of 66 Mips (they are identical to those used in the Encoder). Both have 96 kbyte of RAM used for data manipulation. One DSP is used for antenna diversity, the other is for no antenna diversity. Serial Interfaces The Demodulator has two 13 MHz Radio Frequency serial interfaces connected to the BED. One interface is the Demodulator with Antenna Diversity and the other is the Demodulator with No Diversity. Each interface carries the modulated uplink data for one DSP. One DSP provides the processing capability to demodulate four full-rate TCHs (or eight half-rate TCHs). Software, running on each DSP, individually demodulates the TCHs. The demodulated data streams are passed back to the BED using further serial interfaces from the DSPs. All inputs and outputs are routed via 13 MHz synchronous interfaces.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

37 / 288

2 DRFU

2.9 Baseband Interface Encryption/Decryption

The BED consists of a single field-programmable logic device. It performs the following functions: Generates timing and clock signals for all the BED functions Provides timing interrupts and reset signals for the Encoder, Decoder and Demodulator Provides the clocks and interface lines for transferring the downlink TCH data from the Encoder Encrypts the downlink data according to the GSM-defined ciphering algorithms Stores the encryption configurations and cipher keys specified by the BSC on a call-by-call basis Provides the clocks and interface lines for transferring the downlink data Transfers the uplink data from a parallel-to-serial interface to the Demodulator Provides the clocks and interface lines for transferring the uplink TCH data from the Demodulator Configures the Decryption block on a time slot basis Decrypts the uplink data according to the GSM-defined ciphering algorithms Provides the clocks and interface lines for transferring the uplink data to the Decoder Manages the FHI Provides a set of BED supervision registers, accessible via the ECPL.

38 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

2 DRFU

2.10 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the DRFU. The following information is provided: LEDs External Interfaces Replacement Power Supply Electrical Parameters.

2.10.1 LEDs
The function of each DRFU status LED is described in the following table. LED POWER ON P5V | S5V/3.3V FAULT Red (x 2) Color Green (x 2) Function Both LEDs are lit when primary 5V (P5V), 3.3V and secondary 5V (S5V) power is applied to the unit. These LEDs have the same function. They are both switched on after power on or a reset. Standby state causes the LEDs to blink. The LEDs are switched off if a no fault condition is detected, autotest is running or the system is initializing. Y1 | Y2 Y3 | Y4 Yellow (x 2) Yellow (x 2) The on/off state of Y1|Y2 and Y3|Y4, combined with the state of the red Fault LED, indicates the status of the DRFU. These LEDs are operated under software control. G1 | G2 Yellow (x 2) These LEDs indicate whether the DRFU Configuration Connector is set for G1 or G2 operation. G1 is on for G1 operation, G2 is on for G2 operation. If both the LEDs are on, or both are off, there is a fault.

Table 3: DRFU Status LEDs

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

39 / 288

2 DRFU

The following table shows the status of LEDs Y1 - Y4 for each possible state of the DRFU. The status of the red LED is included for clarification. Status Reset triggered Fault detected by autotest. Out of order. Hardware autotest fault report. Software problem. A restart can be accepted. A reload as required. Standby. No clock available. BSI link not available. FHI link not available. BSI link and FHI link not available. Autotest running. Destructive Frame Unit tests. RAM contents deleted. Non-destructive tests. Non-SCP non-destructive tests triggered by FU. Non-SCP non-destructive tests triggered by OMU (restart command). Off Off On Blink Off Off Red Y1 On On On Off Off Off Y2 Off On Off Y3 Off On X On Y4 Off On X X

Off X X X Off Off On On

X Off On X Off On Off On

X On

X Off

Off Off

Off On

On

On

40 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

2 DRFU

Status Initialization Wait for software load (power on or reload triggered by OMU). Downloading and configuring with OMU messages going on. FU autonomous recovery: autostart after non-SCP [mu ]P fault or restart after stand by. Restart triggered by OMU. Operational O&M configuration completed, waiting for telecom configuration completion. Telecom configuration completed and all Time Slots are spare (or blocked). Fully operational and at least one TS is not spare. Table 4: Status LEDs Y1 - Y4

Red Y1 Off Off

Y2 Off

Y3 X On

Y4 X Off

On

Blink

Off

On

On Off X X X Off

On X Off

Blink Off

On

Off

Off

Off

On

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

41 / 288

2 DRFU

The following table shows the channel identification for LEDs Y2-Y4 after completion of operational configuration. Channel Broadcast Control Channel RACH. Status Not configured. Configured and no RACH received. Configured and at least one RACH received. Standalone Dedicated Control Channel. Not configured. Configured, no channel activated. Configured and at least one channel activated. TCH Not configured. Configured, no channel activated. Configured and at least one channel activated. Table 5: Channel Use Indication Y2 Off On Y3 Off Off Y4 Off Off Off

Blink Off

Off Off Off

Off On

Off Off

Blink Off

Off Off Off

Off Off Off

Off On Blink

2.10.2 External Interfaces

The DRFU front panel has ten LEDs and four Sub-D 9-pin female connector interfaces. A push button is located at the bottom of the front panel. It allows a software reset of the DRFU.

2.10.3 Replacement
Removal and insertion of the DRFU, while power is present on the backplane, can result in damage to the unit. Risk of Damage to Equipment Hot replacement of the DRFU is not permitted.

2.10.4 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the DRFU via the backplane connectors at +5 VDC, that is, primary 5 V (P5V). The DRFU requires an operating voltage of 3.3 VDC. An on-board DC/DC Converter provides the conversion from 5 VDC to 3.3 VDC.

42 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

2 DRFU

2.10.5 Electrical Parameters

The DRFUs electrical parameters are given in the following table. Parameter Input voltage Nominal voltage Output voltage ripple Current consumption Value 5 VDC +/- 10 % 3.3 VDC +/- 5 % 33 mV max. 5 A (Imax.) 0.5 A (Imin.) Short-circuit current limitation Power consumption Efficiency 10 A < 25 W [le ] 85 % at Imax.

2.11 DRFU Physical Description

The DRFU is a single plug-in unit, which is mounted in a standard 19" subrack. This section describe the physical details of the DRFU. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panel Connectors.

2.11.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the DRFU are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 10 T Size (mm) 233 mm 50 mm 280 mm

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

43 / 288

2 DRFU

2.11.2 Front Panel

The DRFU front panel layout is shown below.
Fixing Hole Handle POWER ON P5V | S5V/3.3V FAULT Y1 | Y2 Y3 | Y4 G1 | G2 LEDs

BSIA

DEBUG 1 External Interface Connectors DEBUG 2 DEBUG 4 TRX1

DEBUG 3 (FUTA)

RESET Handle Fixing Hole

Figure 2: DRFU Front Panel Layout

44 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

2 DRFU

2.11.3 DRFU Connectors

2.11.3.1 Front
Connector BSIA Designation Serial interface for monitoring the Abis Interface (for G1 operation only). MMI Interface for firmware downloads to the SCP Flash EPROM. Serial interface to SCP for Diane debug tool. Not Used. Not Used. Serial interface to MFP for Diane debug tool. A Frame Unit Test Adaptor is required, in some applications, to interface to the debug tool.

DEBUG 1

DEBUG 2 DEBUG 4 TRXI DEBUG 3 FUTA

Table 6: DRFU External Interface Connectors The following table explains what each front panel connector is used for.

2.11.3.2 Rear
The DRFU has two female backplane connectors.

2.11.3.3 DFCC
DFCC is used to configure the DRFU for operation with G1 or G2 BTS equipment. The DFCC is a removable plug-in connector. The orientation of the connector to the backplane configures the DRFU for G1 or G2 operation. The correct orientation is indicated on the top of the DFCC.

Backplane Connectors DFCC External Interface Connectors

Figure 3: DRFU Side View Showing the Position of the DFCC

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

45 / 288

2 DRFU

46 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

3 DRFE

3 DRFE
This chapter provides a detailed description of the DRFE.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

47 / 288

3 DRFE

3.1 Introduction
If a DRFU is deployed on G1 equipment, a DRFE (Dual Rate Frame Unit Extension) is required. This is because the subrack backplane connections on G1 and G2 BTS equipment are different. The DRFU DCL1 interface connections are only compatible with G2 BTS equipment. The DRFE provides an interface to the external DCL1 signals, which carry BTS operations and maintenance information to the OMU. The DRFE also provides a voltage-level translation function between G1 and G2 equipment.

3.1.1 G1 Configuration
When the DRFU is deployed in G1 equipment, it must be configured so that the DCL1 signals can be interfaced to the SCP. This configuration is achieved by changing the orientation of the DFCC.

3.1.2 Self-test
When power is applied to the unit, a self-test is carried-out on the DCL1 interface. Two LEDs on the front of the DRFE module indicate the result of the self-test. The LEDs are operated under the control of the DRFU.

48 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

3 DRFE

3.2 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the DRFE.

3.2.1 LEDs
The DRFE front panel has four status LEDs. Their function is described in the following table. LED POWER ON FAULT Color Green (x 2) Red (x 2) Function Both LEDs are lit when power is applied to the unit. These LEDs have the same function. They are switched on after power on, or a reset, while a self-test is carried out on the DCL1 interface. The LEDs are switched off by the DRFU if a no fault condition is detected. Table 7: DRFE Status LEDs

3.2.2 Replacement
Removal and insertion of the DRFE, while power is present on the backplane, can result in damage to the unit. Risk of Damage to Equipment Hot replacement of the DRFE is not permitted.

3.2.3 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the DRFE via the backplane connectors at +5 VDC.

3.2.4 Electrical Parameters

The DRFEs electrical parameters are given in the following table. Parameter Input voltage Value 5 VDC +/- 10 %

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

49 / 288

3 DRFE

Parameter Current consumption

Value 1 A (Imax.) 0.1 A (Imin.)

Power consumption Table 8: DRFE Electrical Parameters

<5W

3.3 Physical Description

The DRFE is a single plug-in unit, which is mounted in a standard 19" subrack. This section describe the physical details of the DRFE.

50 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

3 DRFE

3.3.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the DRFE are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 5T Size (mm) 233 mm 25 mm 280 mm

Table 9: DRFE Physical Dimensions

3.3.2 Front Panel

The layout of the DRFE front panel is shown below.
Fixing Hole Handle

POWER ON LEDs

FAULT

Handle

Fixing Hole

Figure 4: DRFE Front Panel Layout

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

51 / 288

3 DRFE

52 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

4 FUCO

4 FUCO
This chapter provides a detailed description of the FUCO.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

53 / 288

4 FUCO

4.1 Introduction
The FUCO (Frame Unit Controller) is a part of the Frame Unit. It controls the operation of the FICE and DADE. The primary purpose of the FUCO is to control the protocols used at various levels of the Frame Unit. The unit handles: LAPD communication with Mobile Stations, including frame checking and radio link management LAPD communication with the BSC Layer 2 communication with the OMU Layer 3 communication, which handles the following: Transparent routing of messages Processing and routing of non-transparent messages. The FUCO is functionally divided between the SCP and MFP, which are linked by dual port memory.

54 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

4 FUCO

Serial Communication Module

Serial Links (for test purposes)

Reset and Watchdog

Token Bus Controller

DCL1

DMA

Interrupt Controller

Memory

DMA

Microprocessor

LAPD Controller

LAPD Links (to FICE/DADE)

SCP Functions MFP Functions

Dual Port RAM (Transfer Memory)

Clocks DSP Host Interface

Serial Link ICI Clocks To FICE/DADE

DMA ICI

Direct Memory Access Internal Control Interface

Figure 5: FUCO Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

55 / 288

4 FUCO

4.2 MFP Functions

The MFP is a DSP with associated memory and control ports. The DSP firmware is executed from the EPROM. The DSP communicates with the SCP microprocessor via the dual port RAM. The MFP provides the following functions: Multi-frame management O&M processing for Frame Unit traffic and signalling interfaces Communication with the SCP for O&M and signalling channel processing. A serial interface is used for an MMI. The Internal Control Interface is used to communicate with the FICE. It carries Frame Unit O&M information and signals exchanged with the Mobile Station. The clocks are sent to the FICE and DADE for timing.

56 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

4 FUCO

4.3 SCP Functions

The SCP consists of seven functional blocks, which operate under the control of a microprocessor. The SCP microprocessor has three basic functions: SCP basic control Clock generation Data transfer control. An oscillator and divider circuits provide operating clocks for the microprocessor and its peripheral components. These components can be separated into functional blocks as follows: The SCP consists of the following functional blocks: Memory Serial Communications Interrupt Control LAPD Controller Reset and Watchdog Token Bus Controller.

4.3.1 Memory
The microprocessor system has the following memory available: 1 Mbyte of DRAM 128 kbytes fast SRAM (Static Random Access Memory). Upon completion of the start-up sequence, the software is loaded into the RAM, from where it is executed. This maximizes performance and removes the need for wait states. The DRAM is used for high-speed communication between the SCP microcontroller and the MFP DSP. One port of this memory is connected to the microprocessor and the other port to the DSP.

4.3.2 Serial Communications

The Serial Communications Module provides the following functions: A real time programmable clock Internal Input/Output for loading Logic Cell Arrays Two serial communication ports used for integration, testing and debugging purposes.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

57 / 288

4 FUCO

4.3.3 Interrupt Control

The Interrupt Control module manages the microprocessor interrupts priorities (from the external and communication devices). It then transmits the interrupts to the microprocessor.

4.3.4 LAPD Controller

The LAPD Controller provides a 64 kbit/s link using the LAPD protocol. This link is used for signalling communication between the BSC and Mobile Stations. It does this via a PCM frame on the Abis interface.

4.3.5 Reset and Watchdog

The Reset and Watchdog module performs the following functions: FUCO card reset (initiated by power-up, watchdog, front panel push button or MFP) Watchdog monitoring Direct Memory Access priority management Wait cycle insertion after access to slow packages Initialization of dynamic RAM controller. The watchdog counter is periodically reset by microprocessor software. If the software crashes, this does not occur and the timer expires initiating a reset.

4.3.6 Token Bus Controller

The Token Bus Controller provides a 1 Mbit/s Token Bus link (conforming to IEEE 802.4). This link provides the DCL1 connection to the OMU. It is used to download the FUCO and other Frame Unit software, and to transfer O&M messages.

58 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

4 FUCO

4.4 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the FUCO. The following information is provided: LEDs Reset Button Replacement Power Supply.

4.4.1 LEDs
The following table lists the status LEDs located on the front panel. LED POWER ON FAULT 1 2 Description Power supply present System fault Self-tests running SCP microprocessor load

Table 10: FUCO Status LEDs

4.4.2 Reset Button

A reset button, located on the front panel, is used for initializing the FUCO unit.

4.4.3 Replacement
Removal and insertion of the FUCO, while power is present on the backplane, can result in damage to the unit. Risk of Damage to Equipment Hot replacement of the FUCO is not permitted.

4.4.4 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the board via the backplane connectors at +5 VDC +/-5 %.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

59 / 288

4 FUCO

4.5 Physical Description

The FUCO is a multilayer board which plugs into a standard 19" subrack. The following sections describe the physical details of the FUCO. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panel Rear View Backplane Connectors.

4.5.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the FUCO are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 5T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 25.4 mm 280 mm

Table 11: FUCO Physical Dimensions

60 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

4 FUCO

4.5.2 Front Panel

The following figure shows the FUCO front panel.
Fixing Hole Handle

POWER ON
FAULT

LEDs 1 2

Equipment Labels

RESET

Handle Fixing Hole

Figure 6: FUCO Front Panel Layout

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

61 / 288

4 FUCO

4.5.3 Rear View

The figure below shows a rear view of the FUCO.

Multilayer Board

Upper Connector

Mechanical Keycoder

Lower Connector

Figure 7: FUCO Rear View

4.5.4 Backplane Connectors

The FUCO has two 96-pin female backplane connectors. These mate with the appropriate male connectors on the backplane of the subrack. The connectors can be mechanically coded to inhibit insertion of an incorrect board into the subrack. The key coder, adjacent to the upper rear connector, has 12 keying positions. A pin on the subrack backplane mates with a gap in the FUCO key.

62 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

5 FICE

5 FICE
This chapter provides a detailed description of the FICE.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

63 / 288

5 FICE

5.1 Introduction
The FICE (Frame Unit Interface and Channel Encoder) is a part of the Frame Unit. It operates under the control of the FUCO, and provides the following Frame Unit functions: Channel Encoder The Channel Encoder encodes eight independent downlink full-rate channels. Frequency Hopping Interface The FHI is the Frame Units interface with the Frequency Hopping Unit (FHU). It handles: Uplink traffic received from the Carrier Unit, which is passed to the Demodulator. (The Demodulator is implemented as part of a separate board) Downlink traffic sent from the Channel Encoder to the Carrier Unit. Base Station Interface Adapter The BSIA is the Frame Unit interface with the BSI. It handles: Uplink traffic received from the Channel Decoder, which is sent to the BSC. (The Channel Decoder is implemented as part of a separate board) Downlink traffic received from the BSC, to be processed by the Channel Encoder. Frame Clock Unit. The Frame Clock Unit provides all the timing signals for the Frame Unit.

64 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

5 FICE

LEDs

BSS Test Equipment

BSI Dual links to Base Station Interface

Status

BSIA FIFO Data Bus IPI Channel Decoder

Command Serial Interface LAPD Interface FUCO Clock Interface Dual Station Unit

Master Controller

Status FCLU Command Master Data Bus Channel Encoder ICI FUCO

Clock Driver Interface Clock Distribution

IPI

IPI

Demodulator

Status FHI Command

ICI FUCO FIFO FirstIn FirstOut shift register IPI FHU

Dual links to Frequency Hopping Unit

Internal Parallel Interface

Figure 8: FICE Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

65 / 288

5 FICE

5.2 FICE Functions

The FICE contains the following functional blocks: Master Controller Channel Encoder Frequency Hopping Interface Base Station Interface Adapter Frame Clock Unit.

5.2.1 Master Controller

The Master Controller controls the interface between the FUCO and the BSIA, FCLU and FHI. When FUCO commands and messages are received on the ICI, the Master Controller converts them to a status and command format. This is used by the FICE elements. During start-up, the FICE is checked; the Master Controller runs tests triggered by the FUCO. After a reset, the Master Controller initializes the FCLU, FHI and BSIA. While operational, the Master Controller also processes uplink traffic data received from the Channel Decoder. To conform with BSI timing, incoming data is converted from an 8-bit parallel form to a serial stream. It is then sent to the BSIA.

5.2.2 Channel Encoder

The Channel Encoder manages and processes eight time slots, each of which carries the signals for one full-rate channel. The Channel Encoder performs the following functions: Baseband functions, which are: Channel encoding and interleaving Encryption Burst and TDMA multi-frame building. Rate adaptation for the data and speech channels Control of the BTS transmitter power which involves: Routing of the power value Dummy burst insertion Discontinuous transmission. In-band signalling and remote transcoder synchronization.

66 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

5 FICE

BSIA Serial Interface Interface Logic

FUCO ICI

FCLU Clock Distribution

ICI Controller

LCA1

Interface Logic

IRQA DSP Master

64K x 8 EPROM 32K x 24 RAM

SSI+ IRQB

Host
HOST SSI+ IRQA IRQB HOST SSI+ IRQA IRQB HOST SSI+ IRQA IRQB HOST SSI+ IRQA IRQB

DSP Slave 0 2x
32K x 24 RAM

DSP Slave 1 2x
32K x 24 RAM

DSP Slave 2 2x
32K x 24 RAM

DSP Slave 3 2x
32K x 24 RAM

FIFO 1 Interface Logic Test Feedback IPI FHI FIFO IRQx SSI FirstIn FirstOut Interrupt Request x Synchronous Serial Interface LCA2 Watchdog and Reset Circuitry

Figure 9: Channel Encoder Block Diagram

5.2.2.1 DSPs
The main elements of the Channel Encoder are DSPs, a First-In First-Out shift register and LCAs. There are five DSPs: Four slave DSPs, which each process two channels One master DSP which initializes and controls the Channel Encoder, collects traffic from the BSIA and supplies the slave DSPs. In addition to normal program and data memory, the master DSP contains an EPROM. Otherwise, all DSPs are identical.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

67 / 288

5 FICE

5.2.2.2 LCAs
There are two LCAs. The first has three functions: Extraction of data from the serial interface with the BSIA and passing this to the master DSP Generation of incoming time slot information from FCLU clock signals. LCA1 identifies the time slot and the two bits used by each channel, and passes this on to the slave DSP blocks. LCA1 also monitors the activity on each of the clocks, and delivers their status to the master DSP Management of the ICI lines. This involves sending the request status to the FUCO, decoding commands received from the FUCO, and routing FUCO messages to the DSPs. The second LCA contains the output interface logic. It performs the following functions: Control of the output of data from the slave DSPs to the FIFO Control of the output of data from the FIFO to LCA2 (i.e., to itself) Encryption of the data Output to the FHI. A watchdog monitors the DSPs for hang-up behavior.

5.2.3 Frequency Hopping Interface

The FHI connects the Frame Unit with the FHU. This link is used to carry downlink data from the Channel Encoder to the Carrier Unit, via the FHU. It also carries uplink data from the Carrier Unit to the Demodulator, via the FHU. There is link redundancy. The FHI hardware provides automatic link selection.

5.2.4 Base Station Interface Adapter

The BSIA transfers data from the BSI to the Channel Encoder and FUCO, and from the Channel Decoder and FUCO to the BSI. There is BSI link redundancy. The BSIA provides automatic link selection.

5.2.5 Frame Clock Unit

The FCLU regenerates the clock signals it receives from the Station Unit, and distributes the clocks for synchronization. The FCLU receives the Octal Bit Clock, the TDMA Frame Clock and the Frame Number from the Station Unit. It generates the TSCLK itself, so that there are eight TSCLK periods to one FCLK period. The clock signals are supplied from the Station Unit with a dual-redundant link. If both links fail, the FCLU generates its own auxiliary clock signals. In general, the clock supervisors can tolerate one missing clock pulse. For example, when there is a switch from local to the Station Unit clocks. If a more serious error occurs, all Frame Unit functions receive a clock error interrupt.

68 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

5 FICE

5.3 Interfaces
The FICE has the following interfaces: Internal Control Interface Station Unit Clock Interface Clock Driver Interface Internal Parallel Interface Base Station Interface LAPD Interface Frequency Hopping Interface.

5.3.1 Internal Control Interface

The ICI is a high-speed serial interface. This is used by the FUCO to control the other boards in the Frame Unit and distribute clock signals. The interface operates using a master-slave mechanism: slave boards can only react to commands from the FUCO master .

5.3.2 Station Unit Clock Interface

The Station Unit Clock Interface consists of dual-redundant RS-485 links which carry OBCLK, FCLK and FN signals from the Station Unit to the FCLU.

5.3.3 Clock Driver Interface

The Clock Driver Interface is used to distribute clock signals from the FCLU to the rest of the Frame Unit.

5.3.4 Internal Parallel Interface

The IPI is a fast interface internal to the Frame Unit. It is used to: Pass the uplink data stream from the FHI to the Demodulator Receive the uplink data stream from the Channel Decoder and pass it to the BSIA Carry the downlink data stream from the Channel Encoder to the FHI.

5.3.5 Base Station Interface

Each BSI is a dual-redundant RS-485 link which carries traffic signals between the BSC equipment and the BSIA.

5.3.6 LAPD Interface

The LAPD interface is a serial link which carries data between the FUCO and BSIA, and also from BSIA to the Channel Encoder.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

69 / 288

5 FICE

5.3.7 Frequency Hopping Interface

The FHI is a dual-redundant asynchronous RS-485 link. It carries traffic signals between the FICE and FHU.

5.4 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the FICE. The following information is provided: LEDs Replacement Power Supply.

5.4.1 LEDs
The following table lists the status LEDs located on the front panel. LED POWER ON FAULT 1 2 Description Power supply present System fault Channel Encoder operation Frame Unit Interface operation

Table 12: FICE Status LEDs All LEDs remain on during the autotests, and go out when the autotests are successfully completed.

5.4.2 Replacement
Removal and insertion of the FICE, while power is present on the backplane, can result in damage to the unit. Risk of Damage to Equipment Hot replacement of the FICE is not permitted.

5.4.3 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the board via the backplane connectors at +5 VDC +/- 5 %.

70 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

5 FICE

5.5 Physical Description

The FICE is a multilayer board which plugs into a standard 19" subrack. This section describes the physical details of the FICE. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panel Front Panel Connectors Rear View Backplane Connectors.

5.5.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the FICE are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 5T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 25.4 mm 280 mm

Table 13: FICE Physical Dimensions

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

71 / 288

5 FICE

5.5.2 Front Panel

The layout of the FICE front panel is shown in the figure below.
Fixing Hole Handle

POWER ON FAULT 1 2 B S I A Equipment Labels B S I B B S S T E F H I/ F U T A Connectors (with pin 1 shown) LEDs 1 = Channel Encoder 2 = Frame Unit Interface

Handle Fixing Hole

Figure 10: FICE Front Panel Layout

72 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

5 FICE

5.5.3 Front Panel Connectors

The following table describes the FICE front panel connectors. Connector BSIA Designation BSI cable connection to BSI1 Backup link to BSI2 Test interface Test interface Type Sub-D 9-pin (female)

BSIB BSSTE FHI/FUTA

Sub-D 9-pin (female) Sub-D 15-pin (female) Sub-D 9-pin (female)

Table 14: FICE Front Panel Connectors The following table shows the pin assignments for the BSIA connector. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Table 15: FICE BSIA Connector Signal EGA TXDAT FRMAT CLKAT RXDAT TXDAF FRMAF CLKAF RXDAF

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

73 / 288

5 FICE

The following table shows the pin assignments for the BSIB connector. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Table 16: FICE BSIB Connector The following table shows the pin assignments for the BSSTE connector. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Signal TXDTT TXDTF FRMTT FRMTF CLKTT CLKTF RXDTT RXDTF EGT CLKRT NC NC NC Signal EGB TXDBT FRMBT CLKBT RXDBT TXDBF FRMBF CLKBF RXDBF

74 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

5 FICE

Pin 14 15 Table 17: FICE BSSTE Connector NC = Not Connected

Signal NC NC

The following table shows the pin assignments for the FHI/FUTA connector. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Table 18: FICE FHI/FUTA Connector Signal FHIFUAT Shield A FHIFUBT FUTA_TXD FUTA_RXD FHIFUAF Shield B FHIFUBF FUTA_GND

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

75 / 288

5 FICE

5.5.4 Rear View

The figure below shows a rear view of the FICE.

Multilayer Board

Upper Connector X100

Mechanical Keycoder

Lower Connector X101

Figure 11: FICE Rear View

5.5.5 Backplane Connectors

The FICE has two 96-pin female backplane connectors. These mate with the appropriate male connectors on the backplane of the subrack. The FICE can be mechanically coded to inhibit insertion of an incorrect board into the subrack. The key coder, adjacent to the upper rear connector, has 12 keying positions. A pin on the subrack backplane mates with a gap in the FICE key.

76 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

6 DADE

6 DADE
This chapter provides a detailed description of the DADE.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

77 / 288

6 DADE

6.1 Introduction
The DADE (Demodulator and Channel Decoder with Antenna Diversity) is a single board forming part of the Frame Unit. It provides the Frame Unit demodulation and decoding functions in the uplink signal path. The DADE takes the sample bursts from the FHI and builds traffic/signalling channel frames. It can handle eight independent channels. If antenna diversity is used, the DADE averages the two received signals during decoding.
IPI (from FHU) DSP 0 ICI ICI Controller : DSP 11 Demodulator FIFO Clock Management DSP 0 to 3 Internal Timing Demodulator FIFO DSP 4 to 7

Arbiter Timing Triggers Octal Bit Clock TSCLK Frame Clock Watchdog Reset and Clock Control

DSP 0 : DSP 11 Decryption Unit

DSP 0 : DSP 11

Decoder FIFO DSP 8 to 11

External Reset

IPI (to FICE)

Figure 12: DADE Block Diagram

78 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

6 DADE

6.2 DADE Functions

This section describes the DADE functions. The DADE consists of the following functional blocks: ICI Controller Demodulator Decryption Unit Decoder Arbiter Watchdog Reset and Clock Control Clock Management.

6.2.1 ICI Controller

The ICI is a high-speed serial interface, used by the FUCO to control the other submodules in the Frame Unit. The ICI Controller interprets ICI messages to and from the FUCO. The downlink part of the ICI is a multi-point network. Messages originating from the FUCO are simultaneously transferred to all Frame Unit submodules with DSPs. The messages contain the target submodule and DSP address. The ICI controller interprets the command and routes the link to the addressed DSP. The uplink lines on the ICI are separate point-to-point connections. If any of the DSPs requires an uplink to the FUCO, it requests this via the ICI controller.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

79 / 288

6 DADE

6.2.2 Demodulator
The Demodulators (DSP0 to DSP7) perform demodulation of the two diversity channels: The first diversity channel is demodulated by DSP0 to DSP3 The second diversity channel is demodulated by DSP4 to DSP7. Under DSP arbiter control, each DSP fetches a block of input data. It then performs the demodulation processing functions and passes the result to the IPI. (The IPI is the data interface for the Frame Unit. It carries the data stream from the FHI, through the DADE). The following functions are performed: Buffering of the digitized samples (in the FIFOs) Decryption GMSK demodulation Estimation of the channel impulse response TOA estimation Estimation and correction of the carrier frequency offset Equalization based on estimated channel impulse response Soft decision output SNR measurement. Each DSP provides the processing capability to handle two time slots. DSP 0 contains an additional EEPROM and acts as the master DSP. This DSP configures the other DADE components at power-up.

6.2.3 Decryption Unit

The Decryption Unit decrypts the demodulated data it receives from the Demodulator DSPs. All data sent from the demodulator to the decoder passes through the decryption unit. If decryption is enabled by the FUCO, the data stream is decrypted. Otherwise the data passes through unchanged.

80 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

6 DADE

6.2.4 Decoder
The Decoder decodes the demodulated and decrypted signal. DSP8 to DSP11 perform this task. The demodulated data (from the demodulator) undergoes complex processing, which involves the following functions: Quality estimation for link control De-interleaving Convolutional decoding Block decoding FACCH detection Signalling packet extraction Silence Indication frame detection Rate adaptation Inband control of Transcoder Processing of test data Filtering of TOA Filtering of received signal level Carrier Unit monitoring Access burst decoding.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

81 / 288

6 DADE

6.2.5 Arbiter
The arbiter generates the timing triggers for the demodulator and decoder DSPs, and enables signals for the IPI. The triggers are generated separately for each DSP and sent to the DSPs. Their timing is automatically adjusted to take account of propagation delays. The following table describes the triggers generated by the arbiter. Trigger Start trigger Definition Sent to each DSP in turn, at intervals of one time slot. The triggers for DSP0 to DSP3 and DSP4 to DSP7 are sent simultaneously. Sent to each DSP in turn, from DSP0 to DSP7, at intervals of one time slot. Sent to all DSPs simultaneously to mark the pulse of the absolute frame clock.

Transfer trigger Frame clock trigger

Table 19: Arbiter-generated Triggers The following table describes the signals generated by the arbiter. Signal FIFO read enable Definition Generated for each DSP, and mark the periods when each DSP is allowed to read input data. Generated for each DSP, to mark the periods when: DSP0 to DSP7 are allowed to write data to the decryption unit DSP8 to DSP11 are allowed to send output data to the IPI. Table 20: Arbiter-generated Signals

Internal bus grant

6.2.6 Watchdog Reset and Clock Control

The Watchdog, Reset and Clock Control functions supervise the proper working of the DSPs. A periodic watchdog signal is acknowledged when each DSP executes the FIFO-reset driver routine. This occurs each time the DSP reads input data.

6.2.7 Reset Sources

The reset circuitry must ensure proper starting of the DADE after reset or power-up. There are four different reset sources: Power-on reset Master reset from FUCO Local reset by the reset button Watchdog reset.

82 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

6 DADE

6.2.8 Clock Management

Auxiliary clocks are generated for each DSP. These are only enabled during autotest. The operational clocks are externally generated by the FICE. The incoming clocks are supervised by the DSP arbiter, where they are regenerated. In general, all clock inputs can tolerate one missing clock pulse. If a serious error occurs, all DSPs receive a clock error interrupt. A red LED on the front panel illuminates and an alarm is raised at the FUCO. All subsequent actions are triggered by the FUCO.

6.3 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the DADE. The following information is provided: LEDs Reset Button Replacement Power Supply.

6.3.1 LEDs
The following table lists the status LEDs located on the front panel. LED POWER ON FAULT Description Power supply present System fault

Table 21: DADE Status LEDs

6.3.2 Reset Button

A reset button, located on the front panel, is used for initializing the DADE unit.

6.3.3 Replacement
Removal and insertion of the DADE, while power is present on the backplane, can result in damage to the unit. Risk of Damage to Equipment Hot replacement of the DADE is not permitted.

6.3.4 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the DADE via the backplane connectors at +5 VDC +/- 5 %.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

83 / 288

6 DADE

6.4 Physical Description

The DADE is a multilayer board which plugs into a standard 19" subrack. This section describes the physical details of the DADE. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panel Rear View Backplane Connectors.

6.4.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the DADE are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 5T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 25.4 mm 280 mm

Table 22: DADE Physical Dimensions

84 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

6 DADE

6.4.2 Front Panel

The DADE front panel is shown in the figure below.
Fixing Hole Handle

POWER ON LEDs FAULT

Equipment Labels

Button RESET Handle Fixing Hole

Figure 13: DADE Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

85 / 288

6 DADE

6.4.3 Rear View

The rear view of the DADE is shown below.
c b a A B C D E F G H I J K L M 32 Mechanical Keycoder 1 Multilayer Board

Upper Connector

c b a 1

Lower Connector

32

Figure 14: DADE Rear View

6.4.4 Backplane Connectors

The DADE is fitted with two 96-pin female connectors. These mate with the appropriate male connectors on the backplane of the subrack. The DADE is mechanically coded to inhibit insertion of an incorrect submodule into the subrack. The key coder, adjacent to the upper rear connector, mates with a pin on the subrack backplane.

86 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

7 SCFE/SACE

7 SCFE/SACE
This chapter provides a detailed description of the SCFE/SACE.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

87 / 288

7 SCFE/SACE

7.1 Introduction
The SCFE (Station Unit Control Function Entity) is a primary component of a BTS Station Unit. It provides all the O&M and alarm handling functions for a single-carrier BTS. In order to perform these functions, the SCFE consists of two distinct functional blocks: OMU, which co-ordinates all O&M actions inside the BTS EACU, which collects alarms from equipment within and outside the BTS, and also provides outputs for control purposes. For larger BTSs, a SACE is additionally employed. The SACE (Station Unit Alarm Collection Entity) does not contain an OMU (Operational Maintenance Unit), just an EACU for additional input and output lines. The EACU communicates with the OMU via the DCL2 (Q1 Bus) (Service Interface (V.11) (Q1)). Although the OMU and EACU are physically located on the SCFE, they are considered as separate functional blocks.

88 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

7 SCFE/SACE

7.2 OMU Functions

The OMU has the following functional blocks: Microprocessor and Memory Timing and Control Logic Driver Logic Token Bus Interface Asynchronous Interface Base Station Interface.
LEDs DCL2 (EACU) A MMI B

Timing and Control Logic

Driver Logic

Asynchronous Interface

Data Bus Address Bus

Microprocessor + Memory

Token Bus Interface

A B

Base Station Interface

DCL1

BSIA

BSIB

Figure 15: OMU Block Diagram

7.2.1 Microprocessor and Memory

The OMU is designed around a highly integrated 32-bit microprocessor. Boot code is held in an EPROM. At power up, this code downloads operational software from the BSC.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

89 / 288

7 SCFE/SACE

7.2.2 Timing and Control Logic

The Timing and Control Logic block includes the following functions: Real time clock System timer, watchdog and event counter Reset circuitry Board status and control registers Memory access parity generator/checker.

7.2.3 Driver Logic

The Driver Logic provides a number of outputs for front panel status indication LEDs.

7.2.4 Token Bus Interface

The Token Bus Interface provides a DCL1 connection. DCL1 is used for O&M communication between the OMU and the Frame Units, including software downloading to the Frame Units.

7.2.5 Asynchronous Interface

The Asynchronous Interface has two independent, full duplex channels: A and B. Channel A provides the physical connection to the DCL2. This is used for supervisory communication between the OMU and other BTS components: Carrier Units Remotely Tunable Combiner Station Unit Timing and Switching Entity Radio Test Equipment EACU (for supervision on non-intelligent devices). Channel B is wired to the MMI RS-232 connector on the front panel, to which the BTS Terminal can be connected.

7.2.6 Base Station Interface

The BSI is used for O&M signalling and data transfer between the BTS and the BSC. The information transferred in both directions is organized into LAPD frames. For the purposes of BSI communication, the OMU always operates as a slave device. It receives clock and frame synchronization signals from the BSI. The OMU has two redundant BSI connections: link A and link B. If link A carries a clock signal it is automatically selected. If it ceases to carry a clock signal, link B is selected. This function can be switched off so that link B is permanently selected.

90 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

7 SCFE/SACE

7.3 EACU Functions

The EACU (External Alarm Collection Unit) has the following functional blocks: Microcontroller and Memory Input/Output System Timing and Control Logic Q1 Interface.
Supervised Devices Alarm/ Control Lines OMU (SCFE only) Offboard DCL2 Relay A Input/Output System B Microcontroller + Memory Timing and Control Logic Control

Q1 Interface

Data Bus

Address Bus

Figure 16: EACU Block Diagram

7.3.1 Microcontroller and Memory

The EACU is designed around a highly integrated 32-bit microcontroller. An EPROM contains the program code and RAM is used for storing operational data. When powered up, the EACUs microcontroller starts executing firmware held in the EPROM. Self-test routines are run, including checks to ensure that the DCL2 and input and output lines are functioning correctly.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

91 / 288

7 SCFE/SACE

7.3.2 Input/Output System

The EACU constantly checks its alarm inputs (up to a maximum of 32), and updates its internal database when changes occur. The OMU periodically polls the EACU for details of the condition of the EACUs inputs. Example alarms are: RFE fault Antenna Voltage Standing Wave Ratio too high BCCH-Carrier Switch Status Power supply failure Cooling Fan Unit failure. Sixteen outputs are provided for control purposes. The OMU can change the state of the output port by sending a message, containing the appropriate port number, to the EACU. The EACU software performs message interpretation and controls of output ports. Examples controls are: BCCH Carrier Switch positioning RFE and Combiner alarm line test Power supply ON/OFF switching. The EACU has no knowledge of the purpose of each input or output; mappings are handled by the OMU.

7.3.3 Timing and Control Logic

The Timing and Control Logic block includes watchdog and reset circuitry.

7.3.4 Q1 Interface
The Q1 Interface block provides the physical connection to the DCL2.

92 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

7 SCFE/SACE

7.4 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the SCFE. The following information is provided: LEDs Reset Buttons Replacement Power Supply.

7.4.1 LEDs
The following table lists the status LEDs located on the SCFE front panel. LED POWER FAULT OMU 0, 1, 2 Description Power supply present System fault Driven by software, and indicates the status of the OMU. Not present on the SACE. Driven by software, and indicates the status of the EACU.

EAC 0, 1, 2

Table 23: SCFE Status LEDs The following table shows the status of the OMU LEDs. Description OMU Reset OMU Restart OMU self-test running Self-test failure: RAM test Self-test failure: Inverse parity check Self-test failure: Timer test Self-test failure: Serial interface test Self-test failure: Token Bus test Self-test failure: BSI test Self-test failure: Test of Real Time Clock and RAM OMU 2 Off Off On Off Off Off Off Off Off Off OMU 1 Off On On Off Off On On Blink Blink Blink OMU 0 Off Off On On Blink On Blink Off On Blink

If a failure appears in a self-test, the LEDs remain in the state of this test for at least 30 seconds (permanently if the OMU is halted).

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

93 / 288

7 SCFE/SACE

Description Download of file descriptions. Download of OMU software configuration files. Download of Frame Unit Controller software. Download of Frame Unit configuration. Failure during download of file descriptions. Failure during download of software and configuration files. Failure during download of Frame Unit Controller software. Failure during download of Frame Unit configuration.

OMU 2 On On On On On On On On

OMU 1 Off Off Off On On Toggled Toggled Toggled

OMU 0 Off On Toggled Off Toggled Off On Toggled

If a failure appears during downloading of a file packet, the corresponding failure state is displayed for at least 15 seconds. Initialization of DCL1 or DCL2 units. Failure during initialization of DCL2 unit. Failure during initialization of DCL1 unit. Failure during initialization of DCL1 and DCL2 units. OMU operational after BTS initialization. Table 24: OMU Status LEDs Toggled Toggled Toggled Toggled Toggled Off Off On On Toggled Off On Off On Toggled

Note:

The frequency of toggling indicates processor load (whereas blinking frequency is constant). The following table shows the status of the EACU LEDs.

Description A task is running EACU is receiving data via a DCL2 OMU and EACU are connected to external DCL2 EACU and OMU are disconnected EACU connected to external DCL2; OMU is logically OFF (normal condition for the SACE) Table 25: EACU LEDs Status

EAC 2 On -

EAC 1 On -

EAC 0 On Off Blink

94 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

7 SCFE/SACE

7.4.2 Reset Buttons

Reset buttons, located on both units front panels, are used for initializing the SCFE/SACE units.

7.4.3 Replacement
Hot insertion of the SCFE/SACE is permitted.

7.4.4 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the SCFE/SACE via the backplane connectors: +5 VDC +/- 5 % +12 VDC +/- 5 %.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

95 / 288

7 SCFE/SACE

7.5 Physical Description

The SCFE/SACE boards are multilayer printed boards fitted with a single backplane connector. This section describes the SCFE/SACE physical characteristics. It provides the following information: Dimensions SCFE Front Panel SACE Front Panel Front Panel Connectors SCFE/SACE Rear View.

7.5.1 Dimensions
The dimensions of the SCFE/SACE are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 4.5 T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 22.86 mm 233.4 mm

Table 26: SCFE/SACE Physical Dimensions

96 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

7 SCFE/SACE

7.5.2 SCFE Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the SCFE. It includes the two hardware status LEDs, six software-controlled LEDs, Reset button switch and three connectors.
Fixing Hole Thumb Tab

POWER ON FAULT O M U E A C 2 1 0 2 1 0 LEDs

Equipment Labels

M M I

MMI Connector

E A EACU Connector C

C E Centronics Connector N

RESET

Reset Button

Thumb Tab Fixing Hole

Figure 17: SCFE Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

97 / 288

7 SCFE/SACE

7.5.3 SACE Front Panel

The following figure shows the SACE front panel. The SACE front panel is similar to that of the SCFE. The only difference is that it does not have the three OMU LEDs.
Fixing Hole Thumb Tab

POWER ON FAULT
LEDs

E A C

2 1 0

Equipment Labels

M M I

MMI Connector

E A EACU Connector C

C E N

Centronics Connector

Reset Button RESET

Thumb Tab Fixing Hole

Figure 18: SACE Front Panel

98 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

7 SCFE/SACE

7.5.4 Front Panel Connectors

The following table describes the front panel connectors. Connector MMI Designation Connects to the BTS Terminal. Type Sub-D 9-pin (female) Sub-D 15-pin (female) Sub-D 25-pin (female)

EAC

Allows connection of external alarm signals on the SCFE/SACE. For factory use only.

CEN

Table 27: SCFE Front Panel Connectors The following table shows the pin assignments for the MMI connector of the SCFE. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SCFE DCD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS SWI Description Receive line signal detector (data carrier detect) Receive data Transmit data Data terminal ready Signal ground Data set ready Request to send Clear to send For factory use only

Table 28: SCFE MMI Connector

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

99 / 288

7 SCFE/SACE

The following table shows the pin assignments for the MMI connector of the SACE. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal NC RXD TXD NC GND NC NC NC SWI Description Not connected Receive data Transmit data Not connected Signal ground Not connected Not connected Not connected For factory use only

Table 29: SACE MMI Connector The following table shows the pin assignments for the External Alarm Connection.

100 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

7 SCFE/SACE

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Signal EAC_IN_0 EAC_IN_1 EAC_IN_2 EAC_IN_3 EAC_IN_4 EAC_IN_5 EAC_IN_6 EAC_IN_7 EAC_IN_8 EAC_IN_9 EAC_IN_10 EAC_IN_11 VCC_16 EAC_OUT_16 GND

Table 30: SCFE/SACE EAC Connector

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

101 / 288

7 SCFE/SACE

7.5.5 Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view of the SCFE/SACE, including connector. The SCFE/SACE and their slots are mechanically coded to prevent insertion of an incorrect board.
Fixing Hole Octagonal Coding Guide

Connector

Multilayer Board

Octagonal Coding Guide Fixing Hole

Figure 19: SCFE/SACE Rear View

102 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR
This chapter provides a detailed description of the STSE.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

103 / 288

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.1 Introduction
The STSE variants provide two main functions: Generation and distribution of timing signals to other BTS modules Frequency Hopping (to reduce the effect of co-channel interference and multipath distortion - non-extended cell variants only). In any non-extended cell BTS, either an STSE, STSP or STSR is used. In the master BTS an STSE or STSP is used, whereas in a collocated (slave) BTS, an STSR is used. The difference between the three variants is only in the system clocks. The STSE and STSP produce the clocks themselves (the selection of STSE or STSP depends on the type of local network); the STSR simply repeats the clocks from a local "master" BTS. Extended Cell In extended-cell BTS: The ESTS is used instead of an STSE The ESTR is used instead of the STSR. The extended cell submodules generate modified timing signals to compensate for the longer Air Interface delays.

Note:

Unless otherwise stated, references to the STSE, STSP or STSR include the ESTS or ESTR as appropriate. References to the STSE includes all variants.

104 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.2 STSE Functions

The STSE consists of the following functional blocks: Module Controller Master Frequency Generator Master Clock and Frame Number Generator Clock Distribution FHU. The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the STSE variants.
Redundant MCFNG FN serial DCL2 MMI Terminal Module Controller FN serial Redundant MCFNG SCFE

FN serial SMBI 4.096 MHz Reference (STSP only) Host Interface FHI Links FHU Alarms Tuning Control (STSP only) FN parallel Status and Control FN parallel FCLK T1, T2, T3 TSCK OBCLK, FCLK FN serial MFG (STSE/STSP only) 13 MHz 13 MHz Oven Alarm Redundant MCFNG MCFNG 13 MHz MCFNG REFCLK OBCLK, FCLK Clock Distribution OBCLK, FCLK Frame Units and Five collocated BTSs FN serial OBCLK, FCLK Carrier Units and RTE Carrier Units, RTE, Five collocated BTSs Redundant MCFNG ARFCN Status and Control Frame Units Carrier Units RTE

Master Clock and Frame Number Generator

Figure 20: STSE Block Diagram The MFG, MCFNG and Clock Distribution blocks generate and distribute the clocks. The FHU dynamically connects the Frame Units and Carrier Units to perform frequency hopping. When antenna diversity is not used, duplication of the STSE provides redundancy. When antenna diversity is used, the second FHU handles the second (diversity) signal path. In this case, only the clock generation functions are redundant. It is also possible to handle antenna diversity with only one STSE in the non-redundant configuration (when using [le ] 4 transmitters). The following sections describe each of the STSE functions.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

105 / 288

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.2.1 Module Controller

The Module Controller primarily handles messages on the DCL2 to supervise the blocks (according to the OMU). The Module Controller is the only DCL2 node on the STSE. Therefore, the Module Controller is responsible for forwarding commands to the other functional blocks and relaying their reactions to the OMU. The Module Controller converts the FN sent by the MCFNG to a serial format. This serial FN is distributed to the Clock Distribution and redundant MCFNG. The serial FN from the redundant MCFNG is converted into parallel form and sent to its own MCFNG. The STSP connection between the Module Controller and MFG is used to tune the MFG and monitor any MFG alarms. An EEPROM holds the MFGs tuning characteristics (which vary between STSPs).

8.2.1.1 Microcontroller
The Module Controller is based on a 32-bit microcontroller with associated memory and support functions. It has several memory-mapped registers for communication with the MCFNG and Clock Distribution blocks (and MFG on the STSP).

8.2.1.2 Interfaces
The Host Interface is used for communication between the Module Controller and the FHU. The Module Controller also offers an MMI similar to RS-232, to which a terminal can be connected.

8.2.2 STSE Master Frequency Generator

The STSE MFG produces a stabilized 13 MHz clock signal. This is distributed to the local MCFNG and to the MCFNG of the redundant STSE. The clock signal is generated by an Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator. Note that power must be applied to the OCXO for 15 minutes before its output is stable. During this period, an "oven alarm" signal is generated. The MFG is not equipped on the STSR/ESTR.

8.2.3 STSP Master Frequency Generator

The STSP is a version of the STSE which can be used where the local networks PCM clock is extremely stable. The STSP MFG produces a tuned, stable, 13 MHz clock signal which is distributed to the local MCFNG and to the MCFNG of the redundant STSP.

106 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.2.3.1 Internal Crystal Oscillator

The internal OCXO is synchronized with a 4.096 MHz signal derived from the PCM clock in the SMBI. Due to the PCM synchronization, no manual frequency adjustment is ever needed. (This is in contrast to the STSE, where the OCXO is free running and requires periodic calibration). The OCXO is electronically tunable. The frequency is regulated by software running on the Module Controller, by measuring the number of cycles occurring over a long period. The period is timed using the 4.096 MHz PCM clock. If the 4.096 MHz reference signal is not available, the tuning adjustment of the OCXO is kept constant (at the last tuned setting).

8.2.3.2 Alarms
An alarm is raised in the following situations: During warm up (beginning at power up, and ending after 15 minutes) If the OCXO tuning voltage is out of range (OCXO is no longer tunable) If there is an oven defect in the OCXO If there is a write/read defect in the EEPROM.

8.2.4 STSE/STSP Master Clock and Frame Number Generator

The MCFNG on the STSE/STSP receives the 13 MHz clock and oven alarm from the MFG. It also receives these from the MFG of the redundant STSE/STSP (if present). One of the Reference Clock signals is selected. This is distributed to the Divider, the RTE, up to eight Carrier Units, and up to five collocated BTSs. In turn the MCFNG provides as output the REFCLK, OBCLK, FCLK and FN. The REFCLK used in the Carrier Unit as a synthesizer reference is produced in this block. All the necessary drivers to distribute this clock are located in this area. To fulfill the redundancy requirements, the redundant MCFNGs are synchronized together. The OBCLK and FCLK are exchanged between the MCFNG and the redundant MCFNG. So that each MCFNG can react quickly to the failure of the other, there is a direct status and Control link between the two MCFNGs. The status of each MCFNG is held in a status register accessible to both. This is updated following any change of status. The MCFNG has six operational modes: Master Mode Slave Mode Normal Mode Independent Mode Faulty Mode Disconnected Mode.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

107 / 288

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.2.4.1 Master Mode

The MCFNG in Master Mode does not take into account the external reference from the slave MCFNG. Instead, it watches the status Control Link indicating whether the synchronization has succeeded.

8.2.4.2 Slave Mode

The MCFNG in Slave Mode generates its own FN in synchronization with the external reference FN.

8.2.4.3 Normal Mode

Normal Mode is the operational mode of both master and slave MCFNG, if no alarms occur. Normal Mode is entered when the synchronization of both MCFNGs is successful. Each MCFNG generates the various clocks and the FN, and verifies its synchronization with the other MCFNG.

8.2.4.4 Independent Mode

The MCFNG enters Independent Mode if redundancy is lost. Only the OMU can order this mode (except if an internal alarm occurs, leading to the MCFNG entering Faulty Mode). In this mode, each MCFNG generates its timing independently regardless of the second MCFNGs status.

8.2.4.5 Faulty Mode

In Faulty Mode the MCFNG is disconnected from the links to the BTS. Absence of clocks from the faulty MCFNG is detected by the BTS clock receivers of the other (redundant) MCFNG.

8.2.4.6 Disconnected Mode

In Disconnected Mode, the MCFNG is disconnected from the links. The MCFNG waits for delay parameters and then for a mode change command.

8.2.5 STSR Master Clock and Frame Number Generator

The MCFNG on the STSR works as a presence detector for the clocks coming from the master BTS. It then repeats them within the slave BTS. If a clock is absent, an alarm is raised. In an STSR, no synchronization between the redundant MCFNGs is performed. The MCFNG on the STSR has only Normal, Faulty and Disconnected modes of operation.

108 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.2.6 Clock Distribution

The Clock Distribution block receives the signals FCLK, OBCLK (directly from the MCFNG) and the serial FN (converted by the Module Controller). These clocks are monitored and their status reported to the Module Controller. The Clock Distribution block distributes the clocks within the BTS and additionally up to five collocated BTS. The FN signal is not synchronized with TDMA timing and is sent asynchronously. It is available after the beginning of each new frame as soon as the Frame Unit, Carrier Unit and FHU require it for TDMA timing. The FN is sent one frame in advance. To avoid introducing distribution delays, each clock is distributed in the same way to each BTS entity. Timing The Timing Generation in the Clock Distribution block produces the clocks for the FHU timing. Synchronization of remote BTS units is implemented using an STSR on the remote BTS. The MCFNG of the STSR repeats the clocks but performs no status, control or synchronization functions. A relative shift delay between the local BTS and the remote BTS is programmable via the Module Controller. The total delay for each link (i.e., distribution delay plus programmed delay) is equal for all collocated BTSs.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

109 / 288

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.2.7 Frequency Hopping Unit

The FHU dynamically connects the Frame Units and Carrier Units in both the transmit and receive direction. Up to eight Frame Unit and Carrier Units can be used, the Carrier Units transmitting on a fixed frequency.

8.2.7.1 FHU Algorithm

A frequency hopping algorithm generates a pseudo-random or periodic connection sequence. This enables the subsequent time slots, used by a Mobile Station, to hop between a set of frequencies. Non-extended cell variants change the connections dynamically on a time-slot basis given by a Frequency Hopping algorithm. Extended cell variants do not allow frequency hopping. In these submodules the Frame Unit-to-Carrier Unit connections are fixed.

8.2.7.2 FHU Controller

A Frequency Hopping Controller, based around a high performance DSP, executes the algorithm. This calculates the FHU switch configurations. When frequency hopping is used, the switch is configured once every time slot. Additionally, the DSP reads the results of the local loop test (performed via the RTE) and reports any errors to the Module Controller. The algorithm parameters are downloaded during startup of the FHU, or on command of the OMU.

8.2.7.3 FHU Switch

The FHU switch is an 8 x 8 bidirectional switching matrix which provides the Frame Unit to Carrier Unit switching connections. As clocks are generated and supervised elsewhere on the board, the FHU does not perform monitoring of each single clock. Only the absence of TSCK and/or FCLK causes an alarm to be raised here.

110 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.3 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the STSE. The following information is provided: LEDs Trimming Potentiometer Reset Buttons Replacement Power Supply.

8.3.1 LEDs
The following table lists the hardware status LEDs located on the front panel. Marking POWER ON FAULT Description Power supply present System fault

Table 31: STSE Status LEDs

8.3.2 Trimming Potentiometer

The STSE front panel has an access point for a 13 MHz clock-trimming potentiometer, labelled TRIM.

8.3.3 Reset Buttons

Reset buttons, located on each units front panel, are used for initializing the STSE and STSP/STSR units.

8.3.4 Replacement
Hot insertion of the STSE is permitted.

8.3.5 Power Supply

Power is supplied via the backplane connectors at: +5 VDC +/- 5 % +12 VDC +/- 5 %.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

111 / 288

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.4 Physical Description

The STSE is a single plug-in unit, which is mounted in a standard 19" subrack. This section describes the physical details of the STSE. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front panels Front panel connectors Rear view. The STSE variants are multilayer boards, which plug into a standard 19" subrack. The boards and their slots are mechanically coded to prevent incorrect board insertion. The following sections describe the physical details of the STSE variants.

8.4.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the STSE variants are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 6.5 T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 33.0 mm 280 mm

Table 32: STSE/STSP/STSR Physical Dimensions

112 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.4.2 STSE Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the STSE. It includes the status LEDs, the three connectors, the TRIM access point and the reset button.
Fixing Hole Thumb Tab

POWER ON FAULT

LEDs

Equipment Labels

M M I T E S T C L K I N TRIM RESET

MMI Connector

TEST Connector

CLK IN Connector

Trimming Potentiometer Reset Button

Thumb Tab Fixing Hole

Figure 21: STSE Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

113 / 288

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.4.3 STSP/STSR Front Panel

The following figure shows the STSP/STSR front panel. It is identical to the STSE front panel except it does not have a trimming potentiometer.
Fixing Hole Thumb Tab

POWER ON FAULT

LEDs

Equipment Labels

M M I T E S T C L K I N

MMI Connector

TEST Connector

CLK IN Connector

RESET

Reset Button

Thumb Tab Fixing Hole

Figure 22: STSP/STSR Front Panel

114 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.4.4 Front Panel Connectors

The following table describes the front panel connectors. Connector MMI Designation Type

Provides a serial (RS-232) debug interface, Sub-D 9-pin internally connected to the Module (female) Controller. Allows test access to the FN, REFCLK, FCLK and OBCLK signals. Each output conforms to RS-422. This is used if the board is (or is configured as) an STSR rather than an STSE/STSP. Sub-D 9-pin (female)

TEST

CLK IN

Sub-D 9-pin (female)

Table 33: STSE Front Panel Connectors The following table lists the MMI connector pin-out. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Table 34: STSE MMI Connector NC = Not Connected Signal NC RX TX NC GND NC NC NC NC

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

115 / 288

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

The following table lists the TEST connector pin-out. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Table 35: STSE TEST Connector The following table lists the CLK IN connector pin-out. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Table 36: STSE CLK IN Connector Signal GND FNINFCLKINOBCLKINREFCLKINFNIN+ FCLKIN+ OBCLKIN+ REFCLKIN+ Signal GND FNFCLKOBCLKREFCLKFN+ FCLK+ OBCLK+ REFCLK+

116 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

8.4.5 Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view of all variants. It includes the subrack connector.
Fixing Hole Octagonal Coding Guide

c b a 1

Multilayer Board

Connector

80 Octagonal Coding Guide Fixing Hole

Figure 23: STSE Rear View

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

117 / 288

8 STSE/STSR/STSP/ESTS/ESTR

118 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

9 RTED/RTEG

9 RTED/RTEG
This chapter provides a detailed description of the RTE.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

119 / 288

9 RTED/RTEG

9.1 Introduction
The RTE (Radio Test Equipment) provides a mechanism for testing the BTS baseband and radio signal paths. It provides a single channel loopback path between the BTS transmitter and receiver. This allows the Station Unit to send test information to the transmitter and then receive the same information via the receiver. This check ensures that all the data processing, modulation, demodulation and conversion steps are functioning correctly. Thus all the units between the Frame Unit and the Coupling Unit are tested in both the downlink and uplink directions. The signals processed by the RTE are not subject to disturbances on the radio path. The RTE input is directly connected to the output from the Combiner; the RTE output is directly fed into the RFE.

9.1.1 RTE Variants

Two functionally identical variants of RTE are used, depending on the system type: RTED for GSM 1800 networks RTEG for GSM 900 networks.

9.1.2 Functional Boards

The RTE contains the following boards: RXRT DRTE TXRT The RTE consists of three boards, as shown in the following figure.
I/Q Baseband Delayed I/Q Baseband Diversity RFE 1 Diversity RFE 2

Combiner

Receiver Board

Digital Processing Unit

Transmitter Board

Control Station Unit

Control

Figure 24: RTE Block Diagram

120 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

9 RTED/RTEG

9.2 Receiver Board Functions

The RXRT down converts the RF signal from the combiner. This process converts one particular (programmable) downlink frequency into a 45 MHz (GSM 900) or 199 MHz (GSM 1800) Intermediate Frequency signal. The signal is amplified to a fixed level. A second down-conversion removes the 45 MHz (GSM 900) or 199 MHz (GSM 1800) carrier. The signal is then demodulated into I and Q baseband components for output to the DRTE. The incoming RF signal is filtered by a bandpass filter, which suppresses interference outside the downlink frequency range.

9.3 Digital Processing Unit Functions

The DRTE manages the loop test. Under command of the Station Unit, the DRTE activates the RXRT and TXRT, setting them to receive and transmit data on the frequency pair specified. The downlink data received is converted to baseband I and Q signals in digital form. The data is processed by a DSP and then, after a time delay, is converted back into analog I and Q baseband signals. Received power is measured and the transmit power is set accordingly. Interfaces The following interfaces exist between the DRTE and the Station Unit. The DCL2, which is used for command and status report communication with the Station Unit The Clock interface to the Station Unit, which carries the OBCLK, FCLK and REFCLK signals. It provides the RTE with the timing signals necessary for operation Frequency Hopping Controller Link, which carries the ARFCN. This is sent over the FHC link, so that the RTE knows which channel to test.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

121 / 288

9 RTED/RTEG

9.4 Transmitter Board Functions

The TXRT upconverts baseband I and Q signals generated by the DRTE to the required transmit carrier frequency. The signal is filtered to ensure that only frequencies in the uplink are present. The output power is carefully controlled so that it meets the GSM recommendations. At the output, the signal is split to allow testing of BTS with antenna diversity.

9.5 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the RTE. The following information is provided: Replacement Power Supply.

9.5.1 Replacement
Removal and insertion of the RTE, while power is present on the backplane, can result in damage to the unit. Risk of Damage to Equipment Hot replacement of the RTE is not permitted.

9.5.2 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the RTE via the backplane connectors: +5 VDC +/- 2 %, 1 A (RTEG) +5 VDC +/- 2 %, 0.5 A (RTED) +12 VDC +/-2 %, 1 A.

122 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

9 RTED/RTEG

9.6 Physical Description

Both RTE variants have identical physical characteristics. They are enclosed within a metal box conforming to the standard 19" rack dimensions. This section describes the physical details of the RTE variants. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panel Rear View Connectors.

9.6.1 Dimensions
The following table shows the physical dimensions of the RTE. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 3U 10 T Size (mm) 133.3 mm 50.8 mm 280 mm

Table 37: RTE Physical Dimensions

9.6.2 Front Panel

The following figure shows the RTE front panel, including the IN/OUT connectors.
Fixing Hole

IN RF IN Connector

Equipment Labels

OUT

RF OUT Connector

DIV OUT

DIV RF OUT Connector Thumb Tab Fixing Hole

Figure 25: RTE Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

123 / 288

9 RTED/RTEG

9.6.3 Rear View

The RTE rear panel is shown in the following figure.
Fixing Hole

Rear Connector

Fixing Hole

Figure 26: RTE Rear View

9.6.4 Connectors
Three SMA-type female 50 Ohm RF connectors are used for RF input, RF non-diversity output and RF diversity output.

124 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM
This chapter provides a detailed description of the transmitters.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

125 / 288

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.1 Introduction
The primary function of the transmitter is to convert a Digitally Encoded Transmitter Data stream to a modulated RF signal. The output channel frequency is programmable within the downlink band.

10.1.1 Variants
The following table lists the types of transmitter that are available. The variant used depends on the system type and power requirements of the cell. Transmitter GSM 900 Description TXGH - 50 W output power TXGM - 30 W output power TEGM - 30 W output power for extended-cells. GSM 1800 TXDH - 25 W output power

Table 38: Transmitter Variants Throughout this chapter, references to the transmitter are applicable to all variants unless otherwise stated.

10.1.2 Functions
The transmitter converts the digital data stream coming from the FHI into a GMSK-modulated RF signal. It does this by using the local oscillator signal coming from the Synthesizer Transmitter Board. This GMSK-modulated RF signal is amplified to the required transmit power in a multi-stage amplifier. The output power of the transmit amplifier is adjustable under control of the Digital Transmitter Board. This is needed for the power ramping of the burst and power control purpose. Channel frequency selection is controlled by communication with the Station Unit. The Transmitter functional blocks and interfaces are illustrated in the following figure.

126 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

Analog Transmitter Board

I GMSK Modulator I/Q Modulator IF RF Upconverter RF

Power Amplifier Transmitter Board

Power Coupling and Detection

Power Amplifier

RFOutput

Data & Clock

IF Local Oscillator

Local Oscillator Signal

Temp. Sensor Power Control

Forward & Reverse Power Measurement

Transmitter Frequency Synthesizer

Synthesizer Transmitter Board

Control

Carrier Unit Control

Power Control and Alarms Digital Transmitter Board

Display

Display Board

Clocks DCL2

FHI Receiver

Figure 27: Transmitter Block Diagram

10.2 Transmitter Functions

The transmitter contains the following functional blocks: Carrier Unit control Power control and alarms Display GMSK Modulator I/Q Modulator Upconverter Power Amplifier Power coupling and detection Transmitter Frequency Synthesizer. The following sections describe the functional blocks.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

127 / 288

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.2.1 Carrier Unit Control

The Carrier Unit Control block: Supervises the transmitter and receiver Generates clocks and programs the transmitter and receiver synthesizers. The block also monitors the alarm lines of external and internal units. It translates any alarms to error codes for the Station Unit and front panel display. The main functions are summarized below: Communication with the Station Unit via the DCL2 Selecting the clocks from the redundant clock buses Generating the Carrier Unit internal timing for the transmitter and receiver Selecting the FHI link Controlling the transmitter and receiver frequency synthesizers (set under Station Unit control) Providing the Display Interface with the channel number, alarm code and initialization states Booting and supervising the Power Control and Alarms DSP Assembling status information and transmitting it to the receiver Receiving the transmit data stream from the FHU Buffering and transmitting up to two receive data streams (preprocessed I, Q samples) from the receiver Testing the hardware at the FHI Link Supervising and collecting alarms of the Carrier Unit and reporting them to the Station Unit. The TEGM differs from the TXGM in timing generation. It uses time-advanced transmission to compensate for the long Air Interface delay in extended cells.

128 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.2.2 Power Control and Alarms

The Power Control and Alarms block provides digital control of the pulsed Power Amplifier. This guarantees the GSM specified spectrum, output power and envelope. The Power Control and Alarms DSP performs the following additional functions: Carrier Unit control communication Transmit data stream processing Alarm processing. The following information is received from the Power Amplifier Transmitter Board: Forward power measurement Reverse power measurement Temperature. Alarms are raised if the reflected power is too high, or if the temperature becomes too high.

10.2.3 Display
The front panel display shows transmitter states during the initialization phase. Once the transmitter is operational, the channel number and alarm code are shown.

10.2.4 GMSK Modulator

The GMSK Modulator converts the digital transmit data stream into two baseband signals, I and Q. This is achieved by differentially encoding the input, and generating an address which points to sine and cosine values in an EPROM. The digital values are converted to analog signals, amplified and filtered to form the baseband signals.

10.2.5 I/Q Modulator

The I/Q Modulation block translates the baseband signal to the IF. It splits the IF o local oscillator signal into two 90 phase-shifted components. These are mixed with the I and Q baseband signals.

10.2.6 Upconverter
The Upconverter translates the IF signal to the Downlink RF frequency. The I/Q Modulator and Upconverter effectively phase modulate the RF carrier with the baseband signals, while ensuring that the RF amplitude remains constant.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

129 / 288

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.2.7 Power Amplifier

The Power Amplifier boosts the RF output from the Upconverter, in several stages, to the required output power. In the control amplifier stages, attenuators used for power regulation are controlled by the Power Control and Alarms block. Also, the Power Amplifier supply voltage is switchable via control lines. A temperature sensor mounted near the power stage is monitored by the Power o Control and Alarms block. If the temperature exceeds 75 C, a Temperature B Alarm is displayed on the front panel and an alarm is raised at the Station Unit. o If the temperature exceeds 80 C the amplifier is powered down, a Temperature A Alarm is displayed, and a further alarm is raised at the Station Unit.

10.2.8 Power Coupling and Detection

The Power Coupling and Detection block contains a directional coupler for power measurements. It also contains a circulator for deflecting any reflected power, to a termination, if the output connector is disconnected. Forward and reverse power is measured and reported to the Power Control and Alarms block.

10.2.9 Transmitter Frequency Synthesizer

The Transmitter Frequency Synthesizer supplies local oscillator signals to the I/Q Modulator and Upconverter. The frequency of the local Upconverter signal is produced by a Voltage Controlled Oscillator. This is locked to the 13 MHz reference clock from the Station Unit. Frequency programming is supervised by the Carrier Unit Control block. The actual frequency to be synthesized is decided by the Station Unit. If the Frequency Generator is faulty, an alarm signal is generated and the appropriate alarm code is displayed on the front panel.

130 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.3 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the Transmitter. The following information is provided: Display States Replacement Power Supply.

10.3.1 Display States

The front panel display states during initialization for the transmitter are shown in the following table. Display -0888 -1-2-3L0L1L2L3L4-4-5-6P0Description Disable Carrier Unit Control module Test display Display test successful RAM test Initialization of the PSD ports Reset LCA Clear contents of LCA Downloading the LCA configuration Ready with downloading the LCA Test if downloading was successful by the D/P bit Start the Carrier Unit Control module Reading the Carrier Unit interface Reset the clock alarms Reset the Power Control and Alarms processor (if minimum one clock link available) Booting the Power Control and Alarms processor (if minimum one clock link available) Successful initialization

P1-

Table 39: Transmitter Display States During Initialization

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

131 / 288

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.3.2 Fatal Error

If a fatal error occurs during initialization the channel number segments display the moving message HELP. The error codes displayed in this message are listed in the following table. Display 1 2 Description RAM error LCA configuration error

Table 40: Transmitter Initialization Fatal Error Display After successful initialization, the transmitter waits for configuration data. In this state the channel number segments display a dash, and the alarm code segment shows the alarm codes 3, 8 and a dash.

10.3.3 DCL2 Error

If any DCL2 error is detected in a message to the transmitter, the error type is shown, as listed in the following table. Channel Segments -E-E-

Alarm Code Segment 1 2

Description Q1-relay faulty Invalid message

Table 41: DCL2 Error Code The transmit power is indicated by a dash (transmit power OFF) and a blank (transmit power ON) at the alarm code segment.

132 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.3.4 Alarm Codes

The Alarm Codes displayed during normal operation are listed in the following table. Alarm Code 0

Description FHI Link Alarm Fault at one or both FHI links

Receiver Self-test Alarm Fault at Receiver - or Diversity processor

Receiver Alarm Wrong operation point of the LNA Fault at the high gain path. Power difference between I and Q-path >20 dB.

Receiver-Synthesizer Alarm. One or both Receiver synthesizers not locked.

VSWR Alarm. Reflected RF power is too high, VSWR = 2.5 - 4.0.

Transmitter Power Alarm. RF output power has dropped by >3 dB.

Temperature Alarm B. Transmitter temperature >75 o C.

Temperature Alarm A. Transmitter temperature >80 o C. The RF power is switched OFF automatically.

Transmitter-Synthesizer Alarm. The synthesizer of the transmitter is not locked. The RF power is switched OFF automatically.

Clock alarm. One or more clock signals are missing.

blank

No alarm, RF power OFF. No alarm, RF power ON.

Table 42: Normal Operation Alarm Display

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

133 / 288

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.3.5 Replacement
Removal and insertion of the transmitter, while power is present on the backplane, can result in damage to the unit. Risk of Damage to Equipment Hot replacement of the transmitter is not permitted.

10.3.6 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the transmitter via the backplane connectors: +5 VDC +12 VDC -12 VDC +26 VDC.

10.3.7 Output Power

The output powers of the transmitters are listed in the following table. Variant TXDH TXGM TEGM TXGH Maximum Output 25 W 30 W 30 W 50 W (dBm) 44.0 dBm 44.8 dBm 44.8 dBm 47.0 dBm

Table 43: Transmitter Output Powers Each transmitter has power control in 15 stages of 2 dB.

134 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.4 Physical Description

The transmitters are enclosed in a metal box conforming to the standard 19" rack dimensions. The following sections describe the physical details of the transmitter variants: Dimensions Front Panel Output Connector Rear View.

10.4.1 Dimensions
The following table shows the physical dimensions of the transmitters. Dimension Height: Width: TXGM/TEGM: TXDH/TXGH: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 12 T 17 T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 60.9 mm 86.4 mm 285.0 mm

Table 44: Transmitter Physical Dimensions

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

135 / 288

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.4.2 Front Panel

The Transmitter front panel is shown in the following figure. It includes an output connector and status display.
ALARM CODE TABLE 0 FHI Link Test 1 RX Selftest 2 RX 3 RX Synthesizer 4 VSWR 5 TX Power 6 Temperature B 7 Temperature A 8 TX Synthesizer 9 Clock Alarm Code Channel Fixing Holes

Display

Equipment Labels

Handle

TX

RF Output Connector

Fixing Holes

Figure 28: Transmitter Front Panel

10.4.3 Output Connector

The RF signal is output via an N-Type, female, 50 Ohm connector mounted on the front panel.

136 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

10.4.4 Rear View

The rear view of the transmitter is shown in the following figure. It includes the rear connector.
Fixing Holes

cba 1

Rear Connector

32 Cooling Fins

Fixing Holes

Figure 29: Transmitter Rear View

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

137 / 288

10 TXDH/TXGH/TXGM/TEGM

138 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

11 RXDD/RXGD

11 RXDD/RXGD
This chapter provides a detailed description of the Receivers.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

139 / 288

11 RXDD/RXGD

11.1 Introduction
The Receiver is part of the BTS Carrier Unit module. Two identical sets of analog circuitry provide the diversity paths required. The antenna(s) receive RF signals from all Mobile Stations transmitting on the uplink channels. These signals are fed to the Receiver via the RFE. The received signal contains channels, which contain digital data encoded using GMSK modulation. Eight Mobile Stations can share one channel on a time division basis. The Receiver converts the input from one of these channels into a digital representation of the signal. The particular channel selected for conversion depends on instructions received from the Station Unit. The Receiver outputs this digital representation to the Frame Unit via buffers. In the Frame Unit demodulation and extraction of the required data is carried out for subsequent transmission over the Public Land Mobile Network.

11.1.1 Variants
Two types of receiver are used depending on the system type: RXDD for GSM 1800 networks RXDG for GSM 900 networks.

11.1.2 Functions
The Receiver functions can be summarized as: Downconversion of the RF signal Amplification of the signal Analog-Digital conversion Digital preprocessing Output to Frame Unit. Two identical sets of analog circuitry provide diversity paths.

140 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

11 RXDD/RXGD

11.1.3 Functional Boards

The Receiver contains the following functional boards: ARXE Digital Board SRXE
+12 V 12 V I (H) RF Input Analog Board 1 I (L) Q (H) Q (L) RXAL
Digital Board

ARXE

DRX

+12 V 12 V +5 V

STAT STATCLK ILD SLCK OBCKPP+ OBCKPP

LO1

LO2

+12 V SRXE 3wire Bus Frequency Synthesizer Board REFCLK RXSYNAL RXDATA LO1 Diversity Configuration ARXE RF Input Diversity Analog Board 2 Diversity LO2 RXAL DIVAL RXSYNAL PREAL SYNDATA SYNCLK SYNAXEN REFOUT+

Transmitter

+12 V 12 V I (H) I (L) Q (H) Q (L) DIVAL

Figure 30: Receiver Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

141 / 288

11 RXDD/RXGD

11.2 ARXE Functions

The ARXE downconverts the RF signal using a fixed IF, and extracts the GMSK modulated signal. This is then split into I and Q demodulated high and low gain analog signals. The Receiver contains two of these boards. The RF signal from the RFE is fed to a low noise amplifier. This is followed by a bandpass filter to suppress interference from outside the GSM 900 and GSM 1800 frequency ranges. The RF signal is mixed with the local oscillator signal LO1. The required channel is thereby converted into a 199 MHz IF signal. Further filtering is carried out to suppress interference from adjacent channels.

11.2.1 Signal Paths

In order to cope with widely varying signal strengths, the signal is split into two paths, which go through different, fixed-amplification stages. The two signal paths are split again into I and Q components, the Q path being a 90 degree phase shift of the I path. The 199 MHz carrier is removed by mixing with the local oscillator LO2 signal, leaving just the GMSK encoded signals which are forwarded to the Digital Board.

11.2.2 Alarm
If there is a fault with the input signal, an alarm RXAL (for the first/non-diversity input), or DIVAL (for the second input), is raised. The alarms are forwarded to the Station Unit.

11.3 Digital Board Functions

The Digital Board carries out A-D conversion on the two signal paths. It selects either the high or low gain path depending on the signal strength. The digital data is processed and output to buffers located in the transmitter submodule, which forward the data to the Frame Unit.

11.3.1 DSP
A DSP controls all data transfer and data manipulation on the Digital Board. The software is stored on an EEPROM. A Watchdog circuit is responsible for monitoring the state of the system (including the power supplies), and resetting the DSP if an error occurs.

11.3.2 A-D Converters

Fast 12-bit A-D converters produce a digital representation of the two sets of I and Q signals from the ARXE. For each time slot, the eight most significant bits of these samples are forwarded to the Frame Unit for demodulation and further processing. This conversion process, combined with the high/low gain signal path selection, allows the received signal strengths to be within a very high dynamic range. For the non-diversity configuration, a jumper has to be plugged in the Digital Board. In this configuration, the incoming RF signal is duplicated on both diversity outputs.

142 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

11 RXDD/RXGD

11.4 SRXE Board Functions

The SRXE provides the IF and RF signals for the ARXE, as determined by the Station Unit.

11.4.1 Frequencies
Programmable Phase-Locked Loops generate the required frequencies: LO1 A sine wave programmable to the GSM 900 or GSM 1800 uplink frequency channels, minus 199 MHz. The precise value is controlled by the OMU and determines which channel is to be received. LO2 A sine wave fixed at 199 MHz, providing a reference IF signal.

11.4.2 Alarm
If an oscillator fault occurs, an alarm signal is generated which is forwarded to the OMU. A splitter on the LO1 and LO2 signals provides separate outputs for each of the diversity pair of ARXEs.

11.5 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the Receiver. The following information is provided: Replacement Power supply.

11.5.1 Replacement
Removal and insertion of the Receiver, while power is present on the backplane, can result in damage to the unit. Risk of Damage to Equipment Hot replacement of the Receiver is not permitted.

11.5.2 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the Receiver via the backplane connector: +5 VDC, 0.2 A +12 VDC, 1 A +12 VDC, 1.2 A -12 VDC, 0.3 A

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

143 / 288

11 RXDD/RXGD

11.6 Physical Description

The Receiver is enclosed in a metal box conforming to the standard 19" rack dimensions. The following sections describe the physical details of the Receiver: Dimensions Front Panel RF Connectors Rear View.

11.6.1 Dimensions
The following table shows the physical dimensions of the Receiver. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 6T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 30.5 mm 285 mm

Table 45: Receiver Physical Dimensions

144 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

11 RXDD/RXGD

11.6.2 Front Panel

The following figure shows the Receiver front panel. It includes the RF input connectors.
Fixing Hole Handle

IN

RF Input to Analog Board

Equipment Labels

DIV IN

RF Input to Analog Board Diversity

Handle Fixing Hole

Figure 31: Receiver Front Panel

11.6.3 RF Connectors
Two RF-input connectors are provided on the front panel, SMA female 50 Ohm.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

145 / 288

11 RXDD/RXGD

11.6.4 Rear View

The following figure shows the Receiver rear view. It includes the connector which plugs into the backplane of the subrack.
Fixing Hole

cba 1

Rear Connector

Fixing Hole

Figure 32: Receiver Rear View

146 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8
This chapter provides a detailed description of the RFE.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

147 / 288

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

12.1 Introduction
The RFE (Receiver Front End) provides the uplink coupling between the BTS antenna and receivers. The type of RFE depends on the network type (GSM 900 or GSM 1800), and the number of receivers in the BTS. When antenna diversity is used, two identical RFEs are used. The RFE is designed for plug-in installation into a subrack. Its main purpose is to filter and amplify the signal from the receive antenna before distributing it to each receiver. A test input is provided for RF loopback tests.

12.1.1 RFE Variants

Depending on system type and configuration requirements, one of the following RFE types can be used. In addition, a number of functionally identical type-variants are available, from two different manufacturers.

12.1.2 GSM 900 RFEs

There are GSM 900 RFEs for two-carrier and eight-carrier BTSs. The following FEG2 variants are available: 3BK 01841 AAAA (Forem) 3BK 01841 AABA (Celwave). There are also two FEG8 variants available: 3BK 01842 AAAA (Forem) 3BK 01842 AABA (Celwave).

12.1.3 GSM 1800 RFEs

There is one FED8 variant for GSM 1800 RFE. The 3BK 01845 ABAA (Micom) is used for BTSs of between one and eight-carriers.
Test Interface 1 AMP1 RF Input RF Bandpass Filter Directional Coupler Step Attenuator AMP2 Power Splitter RF Output to Receivers 8 Status Status

Controller

LEDs

Control Signal

Alarm Signals +5 VDC Station Unit +12 VDC

AMP Amplifier

Figure 33: FED8 Block Diagram

148 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

Test Interface 1
LNA1

RF Input

RF Bandpass Filter

Directional Coupler
LNA2

Power Splitter n

RF Output to Receivers

Amplifier Module Control Status n = 2 for FEG2 n = 8 for FEG8

Controller

LEDs

Alarm Signals +5 VDC +12 VDC Station Unit

Control Signals LNA Low Noise Amplifier

Figure 34: FEG2 and FEG8 Block Diagram

12.2 RFE Functions

The RFE includes the following functional blocks: RF Bandpass Filter Directional Coupler and Test Interface Amplifier Module Power Splitter Controller.

12.2.1 RF Bandpass Filter

In the FEG2 and the FEG8, the input signal is fed into the RF Bandpass Filter before being passed to the amplifier module via the directional coupler. In the FED8 the input signal also passes through a step attenuator. The RF Bandpass Filter is a multistage type with low insertion loss in the pass-band and steep roll-off. The filter only passes frequencies in the GSM 900 or GSM 1800 receive bands. This minimizes the effects of signals transmitted by the BTS, harmonics of the transmitted and received signals, and any other noise.

12.2.2 Directional Coupler and Test Interface

FEG2/FED8/FEG8 The Directional Coupler mixes the RTE output and received RF signal without any interruption to either signal path. The test input enables loop-testing of the transmission and reception equipment.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

149 / 288

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

12.2.3 Step Attenuator

FED8 only The step attenuator can be adjusted in 3 dB steps using a DIP switch mounted inside the FED8. The step attenuator compensates for different antenna cable lengths.

12.2.4 Amplifier Module

12.2.4.1 FEG2/FEG8 only
The Amplifier Module amplifies the signal. Two Low Noise Amplifiers are used. They are configured as a dual-redundant pair under control of the controller block (one LNA remains on hot standby while the other is operational). The incoming RF signal passes through the input relay to the operational LNA. This boosts the signal which is then fed through the output relay to the power splitter for subsequent distribution. Each LNA is supervised by a power supply current monitor which produces a status signal that is fed to the controller.

12.2.4.2 FED8 only

There are two amplifiers with a step attenuator between them. Each amplifier is composed of two LNAs in a balanced configuration for better performance and reliability. The overall gain is adjusted with the attenuator. The incoming signals are amplified and fed to the power splitter for further distribution. Each LNA is supervised by a power supply current monitor which produces a status signal that is fed to the controller.

12.2.5 Power Splitter

The Power Splitter divides the amplified RF signal to produce separate signals that are fed to the individual receiver inputs. In the FEG2, the received RF signal is split into two separate receiver signals and in the FEG8/FED8 the signal is split eight ways.

12.2.6 Controller
The Controller operates under the supervision of the Station Unit, via a duplex control link. It processes Station Unit control commands. For the FEG2 and FEG8, it also generates control signals to switch the LNA relays.

12.2.6.1 Operational Modes (FEG2/FEG8 only)

The RFE can operate in two different modes (the selection of which is under Station Unit control): Automatic Mode The controller monitors the power consumption of each LNA. If the operational LNA fails, switchover to the standby LNA is performed automatically. Controlled Mode One LNA is selected by the Station Unit, depending on the status of the LNA control lines. When the Station Unit requests a change from controlled mode to automatic mode, the LNA currently in operation remains selected.

150 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

12.2.6.2 Alarm Signals

The alarm signals are fed to the Station Unit via optocouplers in the controller. The following table defines the alarm signals generated by the controller. Alarm Signal AMP-DEFECT REL-DEFECT Definition Generated when either LNA is faulty. In the FEG2/FEG8, this is raised if a relay is faulty. (That is, the relay positions do not allow the proper operation of one LNA, or if the LNA selected by the relays is not that requested by the incoming LNA control signals.) In the FED8, this is a dummy signal that is switched on when the ALARM-CONTROL signal is received. It simulates an alarm function that is checked by the software. SYST-DEFECT Indicates total failure. It is generated when neither of the two amplifier branches are functional.

Table 46: RFE Alarm Signals

12.2.6.3 Control Signals

The following table defines the control signals received by the controller. Control Signal ALARM-CONTROL Definition Inverts the outgoing alarm signals and LEDs, allowing the external alarm circuitry to be checked (by the controller). The results of the test are sent to the Station Unit. In the FEG2/FEG8, this selects the operational mode of the controller.

LNACTL1 and LNACTL2

Table 47: RFE Control Signals

12.3 Antenna Diversity Configuration

Antenna diversity configurations require two identical RFEs to be used together. The second is positioned beneath the first; the first always being the master, the second the slave. Alarm lines in the diversity configuration are combined by subrack backplane connections. The SYST-DEFECT output signal indicates that SYST-1-DEFECT (master) and SYST-2-DEFECT (slave) alarms are active. The two other alarm outputs produced indicate a fault on either RFE; their individual status can be determined only by examination of the LED indicators.

12.3.1 FEG2/FEG8 only

The three incoming command lines (LNACTL1, LNACTL, ALARM-CONTROL) are used for both submodules.

12.3.2 FED8 only

The incoming command line ALARM-CONTROL is used for both submodules.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

151 / 288

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

12.4 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the RFEs. The following information is provided: LEDs Power Supply Performance Characteristics.

12.4.1 LEDs
The following table lists the status LEDs located on the front panel. LED DC1 DC2 AMP REL SYST Description +12 VDC power supply present +5 VDC power supply present Faulty LNA Faulty Relay Fatal system fault

Table 48: RFE Status LEDs

12.4.2 Power Supply

The RFE has the following power requirements: -12 VDC +/- 3 % (0.5 A max) +5 VDC +/- 3 % (0.1 A max).

12.4.3 Performance Characteristics

The following table lists the electrical performance characteristics of the RFE. The characteristics for all variants are identical except where stated. Parameter Operating frequency range (MHz): Noise figure (+50
o

GSM 900 880 - 915 4.5 dB max 5.0 dB max -

GSM 1800 1710 - 1785 3.3 dB max (+50 o C) 3.6 dB max (+70 o C)

C):

(+70 o C): Noise figure for attenuator setting (FED8): 0 dB

1, 2, 3 dB

3.8 dB max

152 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

Parameter FE x 2 gain between output and input FE x 8 gain between output and input: Gain between input and output for attenuator setting (FED8): (-10 (+10
o o

GSM 900 C/+70 C/+50

o o

GSM 1800 12.7 dB +/- 2 dB 12.7 dB +/- 1 dB

C): C):

12.5 dB +/- 2 dB 12.5 dB +/- 1 dB

(-10

C/+70

C):

12.8 dB +/- 2 dB 12.8 dB +/- 1 dB

15.5 - 18.0 dB (-10 o C/+70 o C) 16.0 - 17.5 dB (+10

o

(+10 o C/+50 o C):

0 dB

C/+70

C)

1 dB

1 dB +/- 0.1 dB less than the 0 dB setting value 2 dB +/- 0.1 dB less than the 0 dB setting value 3 dB +/- 0.1 dB less than the 0 dB setting value [ge ] -13 dBm (1710 - 1785 MHz) > 0 dBm (0.1 - 1690 MHz) > -23 dBm (1690 - 1805 MHz) > 0 dBm (1.805 - 12.75 GHz)

2 dB

3 dB

1 dB input gain compression point: Interference level at which signal desensitization is < 1 dB:

> 8 dBm (0.1 - 870 MHz) > -13 dBm (870 - 925 MHz) > 30 dBm (925 - 960 MHz) > 8 dBm (960 - 12750 MHz)

Intermodulation attenuation:

> 70 dB / -43 dBm interference level > 50 dB (0.1 - 816 MHz) > 20 dB (816 - 870 MHz)

> 70 dB / -47 dBm interference level > 80 dB (0.1 - 1400 MHz) > 50 dB (1.400 - 1.686 GHz) (FED8) > 60 dB (1.805 - 3.0 GHz) > 30 dB (3.0 - 12.75 GHz) > 25 dB < 1.5 / 50 Ohm > 30 dB 28.4 dB +/- 2 dB (FED8)

Attenuation relative to passband:

> 46 dB (925 - 3000 MHz) > 30 dB (3 - 12.75 GHz) Isolation between two outputs: Input/output VSWR: Isolation between output and input: Test loop coupler coupling between TEST connector and output port: Test loop coupler isolation between TEST connector and input port: > 25 dB < 1.5 / 50 Ohm > 30 dB 29.0 dB +/- 2 dB (FEG8) 29.2 dB +/- 2 dB (FEG2) > 47 dB min

> 42 dB min (FED8)

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

153 / 288

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

Parameter Controller input via 180 Ohm resistor: Controller output:

GSM 900 Imax 20 mA Imax 10 mA VCE = 0.4 V VCEO = 30 V

GSM 1800 Imax 20 mA Imax 10 mA VCE = 0.4 V VCEO = 30 V

Table 49: RFE Performance Characteristics

12.5 Physical Description

The RFE is a box assembly incorporating electromagnetic shielding where necessary. The front panel is drilled for rack mounting. The assembly is also supported at each side by guides located in the subrack. This section describes the physical details of the RFE. It contains the following information: Dimensions Front Panels Front Panel Connectors Rear View.

12.5.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the RFE are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 3U 10 T Size (mm) 129.0 mm 49.8 mm 280.0 mm

Table 50: RFE Physical Dimensions

154 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

12.5.2 Front Panels

12.5.2.1 FEG2 Front Panel
The following figure shows front panels of the FEG2 variants. These include the RF connectors, LED indicators and a handle to allow simple insertion and removal. An equipment label identifies each variant.
Fixing Hole Equipment Labels 1 RF Output Connector 1 RF Input Connector (ANT) 2 RF Output Connector 2 LED Indicators AMP 2 SYST REL Test Connector TEST AMP REL SYST DC1 DC2 ANT 1 ANT TEST

DC1

DC2

Handle Fixing Hole 3BK 01841 AAAA (Forem GSM) 3BK 01841 AABA (Celwave GSM)

Figure 35: FEG2 Front Panels

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

155 / 288

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

12.5.2.2 FEG8 Front Panel

The FEG8 front panels (both variants) are shown in the following figure. These includes the LED indications, the RF connections and a handle to allow simple insertion and removal. An equipment label identifies each variant.
Fixing Hole Equipment Labels TEST RF Output Connector 1 RF Input Connector (ANT) RF Output Connector 2 LED Indicators 2 ANT 1 ANT 6 5 1 DC1 5 DC2

AMP 3 SYST REL 7

Test Connector

TEST

AMP

REL

SYST

Handle Fixing Hole 3BK 01842 AAAA (Forem GSM) 3BK 01842 AABA (Celwave GSM)

Figure 36: FEG8 Front Panel

156 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

12.5.2.3 FED8 Front Panel

The figure below shows the FED8 front panel. It includes the RF connectors, the LED indicators, an equipment label and a handle for easy removal and insertion.
Fixing Hole Equipment Labels TEST Test Connector ANT RF Output Connector 1/5 1 DC1 DC2 RF Output Connector 2/6 2 REL AMP RF Output Connector 3/7 3 SYST 7 6 LED Indicators 5 RF Input Connector (ANT)

RF Output Connector 4/8

8 Handle Fixing Hole

3BK 01845 ABAA (Micom DCS)

Figure 37: FED8 Front Panel

12.5.3 Front Panel Connectors

Each front panel contains the following RF connectors: One antenna input connector, N-type female Two (FEG2) or eight (FEG8/FED8) receiver output connectors, SMA-type female One RTE test connector, also SMA-type female.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

157 / 288

12 FED8/FEG2/FEG8

12.5.4 Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view (common to all variants). It includes a connector for the power supply, control and alarm lines.
Fixing Hole

Rear Connector

Fixing Hole Pin 1, Row A

Figure 38: RFE Rear View

158 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG
This chapter provides a detailed description of the Antenna Pre-Amplifier.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

159 / 288

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.1 Introduction
The antenna pre-amplifier units operate within the GSM 900 or GSM 1800 uplink bands. Two sets are required for antenna diversity. Each set consists of two main units as shown in the following table. Variant GSM 900 Contents TMAG RMCG GSM 1800 TMAD RMCD Table 51: Antenna Pre-amplifier Sets The TMAD/TMAG provides the initial gain and is housed in a small casing located at the base of the antenna. The RF input connects directly to the antenna and its output connects to the Receiver Multicoupler via the Long RF cable. The RMCD/RMCG is located in the BTS cabinet, replacing the usual Receiver Front-End. It further amplifies the RF signal to a fixed overall gain and monitors for faults. An output splitter feeds the amplified RF to the receiver(s).

Note:

References to the GSM 900 submodules also include the GSM 1800 submodules, unless otherwise stated. Logical Position The figure below shows the logical positionning of the antenna pre-amplifier.
Tower
Antenna

BTS

TMAG/ TMAD Long RF Cable

RMCG/ RMCD

Receivers

Figure 39: Antenna Pre-amplifier Logical Positioning

160 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.2 TMAD/TMAG Functions

The Tower Mounted Amplifier is connected directly to the antenna and provides the following features: Fault tolerant, low noise amplification of the received RF signal Pilot tone injection for fault monitoring DC loop antenna monitoring Alarm generation for fault conditions.

13.2.1 Functional Blocks

The Tower Mounted Amplifier contains the following functional blocks: Band Pass Filter Coupler Pilot Tone Generator Pilot Tone Detector Low Noise Amplifier Remote DC Feed T-junction DC/DC Converter Overvoltage Protector Control Board.
Receive Antenna Band Pass Filter Low Noise Amplifier Pilot Tone Detector DC/DC Converter Remote DC Feed TJunction RMCG/ RMCD

Coupler

Overvoltage Protector

Pilot Tone Generator

Signalling to RMCD (Alarms)

+8 V +4 V Power Supply Tone Detect Pilot Tone Control DC Loop Control Board

Figure 40: Tower Mounted Amplifier Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

161 / 288

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.2.2 Band Pass Filter

The Band Pass Filter rejects all frequencies outside the GSM 900 or GSM 1800 receive bands. In order to monitor the antenna cable, this block also connects a DC loop current from the Control Board to the antenna and passes the returned DC signal back. Depending on antenna type, the loss of the return signal can suggest a fault.

13.2.3 Coupler
The coupler provides a passive mechanism for adding and monitoring the pilot tone on the RF signal path.

13.2.4 Pilot Tone Generator

A pilot tone is injected into the RF signal at the first coupler. This test signal is used for fault monitoring of the Tower Mounted Amplifier and cable by the Receiver Multicoupler, and signal level measurement during installation.

13.2.5 Pilot Tone Detector

The Tower Mounted Amplifier directly monitors the pilot tone and raises an alarm in its absence. This allows a pilot tone generator fault to be distinguished from other Tower Mounted Amplifier, cable or Receiver Multicoupler failures.

13.2.6 Low Noise Amplifier

The LNA provides pre-cable RF amplification. Fault tolerance is realized in the gain section using two balanced amplifiers each operating with opposing phase shifts. Their outputs are summed. Therefore, the failure of a single amplifier does not result in total failure, just a gain degradation of about 6 dB and an increase in noise of 3 dB. The TMAG includes a switchable attenuator to remove the effect of the gain reduction.

13.2.7 Remote DC Feed T-Junction

The Tower Mounted Amplifier is powered by a DC feed on the RF cable from the Receiver Multicoupler. Power is extracted using a T-junction with an RF-decoupled DC port.

13.2.8 DC/DC Converter

Using power extracted by the Remote DC Feed T-Junction, the DC/DC Converter provides power at the voltages required by the Tower Mounted Amplifier circuits.

13.2.9 Overvoltage Protector

Protection circuitry secures the Tower Mounted Amplifier against lightning damage.

162 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.2.10 Control Board

The control board monitors the units status and can raise warnings in the event of pilot tone failure, or DC loop failure. The Tower Mounted Amplifier signals alarms to the Receiver Multicoupler by adjusting the DC current it draws from the RF cable. Four distinct levels are used to indicate: Alarms Normal operation - no alarms Pilot tone failure No DC loop Both pilot tone and DC loop failure. The current drawn by the Tower Mounted Amplifier for amplification, etc., is negligible compared to the difference in current drawn between each alarm state.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

163 / 288

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.3 RMCD/RMCG Functions

The Receiver Multicoupler provides the following functions for the antenna pre-amplifier: Variable gain amplification of RF signal Pilot tone monitoring and fault reporting Signal splitting Power supply to Tower Mounted Amplifier. The Receiver Multicoupler contains the following functional blocks: Overvoltage/Lightning Protector Remote DC Feed Continuously Variable Attenuator Pilot Tone Detector 1 Test loop Amplification stages Pilot Tone Detector 2 One-to-Eight Power Splitter Couplers Band Pass Filters Control Board.

164 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

TMAD/ TMAG

Band Pass Filter Overvoltage/ Lightning Protection DC Feed/Alarms Pilot Tone Detect Remote DC Feed Continuously Variable Attenuator Coupler Band Pass Filter Pilot Tone Detector 1 Coupler

Radio Test Equipment

+12 V Control Board +5 V Balanced LNA

2nd Stage Amplifier

Coupler Band Pass Filter

1 > 8 Power Splitter

Receivers

Pilot Tone Detect Alarms Alarm Test In

Pilot Tone Detector 2

Station Unit

Figure 41: Receiver Multicoupler Block Diagram

13.3.1 Overvoltage/Lightning Protector

An Overvoltage/Lightning Protector provides protection against high voltages, such as those caused by lightning strikes. This protects the Receiver Multicoupler against damage from high voltage impulses in the RF cable.

13.3.2 Remote DC Feed

The Receiver Multicoupler uses an inductor to feed DC power to the Tower Mounted Amplifier via the RF cable.

13.3.3 Continuously Variable Attenuator

A variable attenuator can be adjusted from the front panel to modify the overall gain. During installation the pilot tone is used as a reference signal and the output amplitude is adjusted to give a specified overall gain independent of cable attenuation.

13.3.4 Pilot Tone Detector 1

The Receiver Multicoupler measures the amplitude of the incoming pilot tone. If no pilot tone is detected, an alarm is raised to indicate total failure of the Tower Mounted Amplifier or cable. If the pilot tone has an amplitude half of that expected, an alarm is raised to indicate a partial failure of the Tower Mounted Amplifier (i.e., one of the two balanced pairs).

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

165 / 288

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.3.5 Test Loop

Radio Test Equipment can be connected to the Receiver Multicoupler via a Test Loop Input on the front panel. The signal applied is coupled to the RF channel via a filter. This suppresses the pilot tone on the test port.

13.3.6 Amplification Stages

Similar to the Tower Mounted Amplifier, the Receiver Multicoupler provides fault tolerance in the gain section using two balanced amplifiers. A final gain stage provides the outgoing RF signal which is distributed to the receivers.

13.3.7 Pilot Tone Detector 2

The Receiver Multicoupler again measures the amplitude of the pilot tone. Depending on the condition of other alarms, this can indicate partial or total failure of the amplification stages.

13.3.8 One-to-Eight Power Splitter

The amplified received RF signal is now split into eight outputs, each of which can be connected to the RF input of a receiver.

13.3.9 Couplers
The Couplers provide a passive mechanism for adding and monitoring signals on the RF signal path.

13.3.10 Band Pass Filters

The Band Pass Filters are used to select only particular frequencies from (or for) the RF signal path.

13.3.11 Control Board

The Control Board performs Receiver Multicoupler/Tower Mounted Amplifier alarm filtering and pilot tone monitoring. Circuitry on the Control Board ensures secondary false alarms are not generated as a consequence of a single failure. The following table lists the three collective alarms generated by the Control Board. Alarm T.DEF R.DEF S.DEF Description Tower Mounted Amplifier faulty but still operative Receiver Multicoupler faulty but still operative Total system failure

Table 52: Antenna Pre-amplifier Alarms

Note:

A DIP switch on the side of the Receiver Multicoupler can be set. This suppresses false alarms when an antenna is used that has no DC return path.

166 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.4 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the Antenna Pre-Amplifier. The following information is provided: LEDs Power Supply Performance Characteristics Special Environmental Conditions.

13.4.1 LEDs
The following table lists the status LEDs located on the RMCD/RMCG front panel. LED DC R.DEF R.DEG T.DEF T.DEG PIL CTB LOOP Description Power at Receiver Multicoupler. Receiver Multicoupler LNA total failure. Receiver Multicoupler LNA one stage failure. Tower Mounted Amplifier LNA total failure. Tower Mounted Amplifier LNA one stage failure. Pilot Tone Generator failure. Power on Control Board. No DC loop at antenna (status indication only).

Table 53: RMCD/RMCG Alarm and Status LEDs

LOOP LED If an antenna without a DC return path is used, the LOOP LED is permanently illuminated. If the antenna has a DC return path, the LED is normally extinguished. In this case, the illumination of the LOOP LED indicates a fault at the antenna or the cable.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

167 / 288

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.4.2 Power Supply

The Tower Mounted Amplifier derives its DC power supply from the Receiver Multicouplers +12 VDC supply, via the feed from the RF cable. The unit has high immunity against interference in the power supply. The Receiver Multicoupler is powered via its rear connector: +12 VDC +/- 3 % (0.6 Amax) +5 VDC +/- 3 % (0.1 Amax).

13.4.3 Performance Characteristics

The Receiver Multicoupler/Tower Mounted Amplifier performance characteristics are shown in the following table. Parameter Operating frequency range (MHz): Noise figure (+50 (+70 TMAD/TMAG gain
o o

GSM 900 880 - 915 5.0 dB max 5.5 dB max 12.5 dB +/- 2 dB

GSM 1800 1710 - 1785 5.5 dB max 6.0 dB max 12.5 dB +/- 2 dB

C): C):

(-33 o C/+70 o C): (-10 o C/+70 o C):

RMCG/RMCD gain

12.5 dB +/- 2 dB

12.5 dB +/- 2 dB

Attenuation relative to passband:

> 50 dB (0.1-816 MHz) > 20 dB (816-870 MHz) > 46 dB (925-3000 MHz) > 30 dB (3-12.75 GHz)

> 80 dB (0.1-1400 MHz) > 50 dB (1.400-1.686 GHz) > 60 dB (1.805-3.0 GHz) > 30 dB (3.0-12.75 GHz) > 30 dB 29 dB +/- 2 dB

Isolation between output and input: Test loop coupler coupling between TEST connector and output port: Test loop coupler isolation between TEST connector and input port: Pilot signal frequency: Pilot signal/ spurious at input:

> 30 dB 29.0 dB +/- 2 dB (FEG8)

> 42 dB

> 70 dB

700 - 800 MHz +/- 10 MHz -57 dBm max 0.1 MHz 12.75 GHz -15 dBm max -30 dBm max

1850 - 1870 MHz -57 dBm max 0.1 MHz - 12.75 GHz -15 dBm max -30 dBm max

output: probe input:

168 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

Parameter Continuously variable attenuator: Gain failure attenuator:

GSM 900 6 dB min (continuous) 6 dB min +/- 0.5 dB in one step

GSM 1800 6 dB min (continuous) N/A

Table 54: Receiver Multicoupler/Tower Mounted Amplifier Performance Characteristics

13.4.4 Special Environmental Conditions

The Tower Mounted Amplifier is designed with a high level of protection from all the adverse environmental conditions it may experience. It has an extended operating temperature range: Minimum temperature: -33 o C Maximum temperature: +70 o C. EMC protection is afforded by the metal casing and the use of shielded cables.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

169 / 288

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.5 TMAD/TMAG Physical Description

The Tower Mounted Amplifier electronics are mounted in a weatherproof die-cast aluminium housing. This is constructed as an open container with a lid. The two parts are clamped together and sealed by a gasket. Air holes in the box prevent condensation from accumulating. This section describes the physical details of the Tower Mounted Amplifier. It provides the following information: Dimensions and Weight Front and Side Views RF Connectors.

13.5.1 Dimensions and Weight

13.5.1.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the Tower Mounted Amplifier are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size 259 mm 153 mm 129 mm

Table 55: Tower Mounted Amplifier Physical Dimensions

13.5.1.2 Weight
The Tower Mounted Amplifier weighs approximately 5 kg.

170 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.5.2 Front and Side Views

The following figure shows the front and side views of the Tower Mounted Amplifier.

Circuitry

Air Holes Ground Connector

Equipment Labels RF Connectors Side View Input (Antenna) Output (Long RFCable)

Front View (lid removed)

Figure 42: Tower Mounted Amplifier Front and Side Views

13.5.3 RF Connectors
The RF connectors for attaching the antenna and output cables protrude from the bottom of the casing by 16 mm. Both input and output RF connectors on the Tower Mounted Amplifier are 7/16 female and sealed to the casing with conductive O-rings: N female for RF input SMA female for 1 to 8 splitter outputs SMA female for test loop input.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

171 / 288

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.6 RMCD/RMCG Physical Description

The Receiver Multicoupler is a plug-in unit for a 19" subrack. This section describes the physical details of the Receiver Multicoupler. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panel Rear View.

13.6.1 Dimensions
The following table shows the dimensions of the Receiver Multicoupler. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 3U 10 T Size (mm) 133.35 mm 50.8 mm 280 mm

Table 56: Receiver Multicoupler Physical Dimensions

172 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.6.2 Front Panel

The front panel for the Receiver Multicoupler is shown below. It includes the RF connectors, the alarm and status LEDs, equipment labels and the Test Loop connector.
Fixing Hole 1 RF Output Connectors 1/5 ANT 2 RF Output Connectors 2/6 R.DEF T.DEF 3 CTB RF Output Connectors 3/7 GAIN Gain Adjustment 4 RF Output Connectors 4/8 Thumb Tap TEST 8 Test Loop Input Connector DC LOOP R.DEG T.DEG PIL 7 6 RF Input (from Tower Mounted Amplifier) 5 Equipment Labels

Alarm and Status LEDs

Fixing Hole

Figure 43: Receiver Multicoupler Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

173 / 288

13 TMAD/RMCD/TMAG/RMCG

13.6.3 Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view of the Receiver Multicoupler. It includes its backplane connector.
Fixing Hole

CBA

32 Fixing Hole

Figure 44: Receiver Multicoupler Rear View

174 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D
This chapter provides a detailed description of the RTC.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

175 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.1 Introduction
The RTC (Remotely Tunable Combiner) combines RF signals from up to eight transmitters to a common output for transmission via a single antenna. In addition it provides isolation of incoming RF signals, monitors forward and reflected RF output power (for antenna/cable fault checking), and produces status information. Combination is achieved using single-pole cavity filters, the outputs of which are coupled together. Each cavity filter is attached to one transmitter and tuned to its particular channel frequency. RTCs are available from two different manufacturers: Forem Celwave.

14.1.1 GSM 900

The following RTC components are available: The Celwave RTC variants are: CRBG CREG. The Forem RTC variants are: FRBG FREG. The FRBG or CRBG alone allow the combination of up to four channels. Expansion to eight is achieved with the subsequent addition of a FREG or CREG respectively. It is not possible to mix Forem and Celwave components.

14.1.2 GSM 1800

The following RC4D and RC8D components are available: Celwave Forem. The RC4D allows the combination of up to four channels. RC8D replaces the RC4D to combine up to eight carriers.

14.1.3 Logical Position

The following Figure shows the logical positionning of theRTC.

176 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

Transmitter 1

RF

Transmit Antenna Remotely Tunable Combiner RF RF

Transmitter 2

RF

RF Transmitter n n max = 8 Radio Test Equipment

Figure 45: RTC Logical Positioning

14.2 RTC Functional Blocks

All the RTC variants have the following functional blocks in common: BCCH-Carrier Switch Isolators Cavity block and cable harness/coupling. The Forem variants also have the following functional blocks: Transmit Module Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit Microcontrollers DC/DC Converter. The Celwave variants also have the following functional blocks: Transmit Filter VSWR measurement Motherboard/Control Board. The RTC variants have slight differences in design. These are illustrated in the following figures.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

177 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.2.1 Forem GSM 1800 RTC

The following figure shows a block diagram of the Forem GSM 1800 RTC.
Station Unit RF Input 1 BCCH Carrier Switch Isolator Cavity Block & Cable Harness Transmit Antenna

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Transmit Module Control Radio Test Equipment Station Unit DC in Station Unit

RF Input 2

Variable Band Pass Filter

Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit DC/DC Converter

Slave Microcontroller(s)* and Tuning Detectors**

RF Input 3

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Master Microcontroller RF Input n n = 4 (RC4D) n = 8 (RC8D)

Variable Band Pass Filter

RS232 DCL2

Isolator

Power

* The RC8D has two slave microcontrollers; one for cavities 1 4 and a second for cavities 5 8

** One Tuning Detector per two cavities

Figure 46: Forem RC4D/RC8D Block Diagram

178 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.2.2 Forem GSM RTC

The following figure shows a block diagram of the Forem GSM 900 RTC.
Cavity Block & Coupling
Variable Band Pass Filter

Transmit Antenna

RF Input 1 BCCH Carrier Switch RF Input 2

Isolator

Transmit Module Control Radio Test Equipment Station Unit

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit DC/DC Converter

Slave Microcontroller and Tuning Detector

RF Input 3

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Power

RF Input 4

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Power FRBG FREG Cavity Block & Cable Harness

Variable Band Pass Filter

Master Microcontroller

RS232 DCL2

RF Input 5

Isolator

Slave Microcontroller and Tuning Detector

RF Input 6

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

DC/DC Converter

RF Input 7

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Control RF Input 8 Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Figure 47: FRBG/FREG Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

179 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.2.3 Celwave GSM RTC

The following figure shows a block diagram of the Celwave GSM 900 RTC.
Cavity Blocks & Coupling
Variable Band Pass Filter

RF Input 1

Isolator BCCH Carrier Switch Isolator

RF Input 2

Variable Band Pass Filter

Tuning Detector

RF Input 3

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Motherboard Control Board VSWR Microcontroller, Communication and Tuning Microcontroller, DC/DC Converter Circuitry

Station Unit DCL2 RS232 Power Transmit Antenna

RF Input 4

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Control

Coupling RF Outputs

Transmit Filter

VSWR
Measurement

CRBG CREG Cavity Blocks & Coupling

Variable Band Pass Filter

Radio Test Equipment

RF Input 5

Isolator

RF Input 6

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Tuning Detector

RF Input 7

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

RF Input 8

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Figure 48: CRBG/CREG Block Diagram

180 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.2.4 Celwave GSM 1800 RTC

The following figure shows a block diagram of the Celwave GSM 1800 RTC.
Cavity Blocks & Coupling Radio Test Equipment Transmit Antenna

RF Input 1

Isolator BCCH Carrier Switch Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Transmit Filter

VSWR Measure ment

RF Input 2

Variable Band Pass Filter

Tuning Detector(s)*

RF Input 3

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Motherboard
Control Board VSWR Alarm Microcontroller, Communication and Tuning Microcontroller, DC/DC Converter Circuitry

Station Unit DCL2 RS232 DC in

RF Input n n = 4 (RC4D) n = 8 (RC8D)

Isolator

Variable Band Pass Filter

Control * The RC8D has two Tuning Detec tors; one for cavities 1 4 and a second for cavities 5 8

Figure 49: Celwave RC4D/RC8D Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

181 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.2.5 BCCH-Carrier Switch

A BCCH-Carrier must be maintained in each cell. The RTC provides carrier backup using a built-in BCCH-Carrier Switch. This allows a second transmitter to take over the functionality, transmit frequency and RTC cavity of the BCCH-Carrier transmitter if it fails. Software Compatibility To retain software compatibility with earlier equipment (depending on the software/hardware variants in use), the BCCH-Carrier Switch is used, rather than changing the frequency of the redundant cavity.

14.2.6 Isolators
Isolators reduce signal intermodulation products between transmitters. Each Isolator is connected to a power load. This absorbs reflected power for up to one minute if an excessive VSWR condition occurs at the output of the RTC. Even if a short-circuit occurs at the output, damage to the components is avoided - a VSWR alarm shuts-down the transmitters within one minute.

14.2.7 Cavity Block and Cable Harness/Coupling

Each cavity consists of one Band Pass Filter with a stepper motor to adjust the center frequency. The dielectric resonator (Forem) or waveguide (Celwave) type single-pole cavities enable the connection of many transmitters to one common line. Tuning detectors allow fine tuning of the cavities to the required channel frequencies. These are used both initially to set the cavity, and subsequently for periodic retuning to compensate for drift. The Cable Harness/Coupling is a network of coaxial lines. These are electrically dimensioned to allow the connection of the RF outputs of the cavities to one common point. The harness is kept short to keep losses low.

182 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.3 Forem RTC

The Forem RTC module consists of the following functional blocks: Transmit Module Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit Microcontrollers and Tuning Detectors DC/DC Converter.

14.3.1 Transmit Module

The Transmit Module consists of the following parts: Transmit Filter Antenna Directional Coupler.

14.3.1.1 Transmit Filter

The Transmit Filter suppresses spurious noise outside the transmit band and reduces transmitted intermodulation in the receive band.

14.3.1.2 Antenna Directional Coupler

The Antenna Directional Coupler samples forward and reflected power at the output connector. It does this to measure the return loss of the antenna. It is also couples some RF power to the RTE to enable BTS baseband and radio path tests.

14.3.2 Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit

The Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit continuously monitors and compares the forward and reflected power at the antenna connection. It uses a detector at the antenna directional-coupler for this function. Power is supplied directly by the Station Unit. Therefore, the Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit is independent of the DC/DC Converter. The following alarms can be generated if the VSWR exceeds pre-set limits: VSWR0 VSWR1

14.3.2.1 VSWR0
VSWR0 is generated in the event of a deterioration in the performance of the antenna or cable. The reflected power threshold can be configured via a selector on the front panel. This allows various types of antenna and cable to be installed.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

183 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.3.2.2 VSWR1
VSWR1 is generated when the VSWR is very high. This indicates a serious deterioration in cable or antenna performance, meaning: Antenna or cable is broken RTC may sustain damage due to high output mismatch Damage to the RTC is possible due to high reflected power. In the event of this alarm, the RF-transmit power must be removed within one minute to avoid RTC damage.

14.3.3 Microcontrollers
Two embedded microcontrollers provide the following facilities: Master Microcontroller Slave Microcontroller(s) and Tuning Detector(s).

14.3.3.1 Master Microcontroller

The Master Microcontroller handles the two communication channels provided for control and status information reporting: DCL2 for remote communication with the Station Unit RS-232 for local communication with the operator. It is not possible to use both these interfaces at the same time. A switch on the front panel is used to select between them. The Master Microcontroller also supervises the Slave Microcontroller.

14.3.3.2 Slave Microcontroller and Tuning Detectors

The Slave Microcontroller and Tuning Detectors control the cavity tuning stepper motors. Control is based on the requirements provided by the operator and status information from the tuning detector(s). An EEPROM is used to hold all status information and ensure that no data is lost in the event of a power supply failure.

14.3.4 DC/DC Converter

The DC/DC Converter is used to supply power to all components inside the RTC (except the VSWR Alarm Unit). Failure of the DC/DC Converter does not result in the failure of the RTC; only communication and retuning are lost.

184 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.4 Celwave RTC

The Celwave RTC module consists of the following functional blocks: Transmit Filter VSWR Measurement Motherboard/Control Board.

14.4.1 Transmit Filter

The Celwave Transmit Filter performs the same task as the Transmit Filter of the Forem Transmit Module.

14.4.2 VSWR Measurement

The Celwave VSWR Measurement block performs the same task as the Antenna Directional Coupler of the Forem Transmit Module.

14.4.3 Motherboard/Control Board

The Motherboard is used to interconnect the Control Board and the various RTC components. The Celwave Control Board contains all the electronics required to provide the same control functions already described for the Forem RTCs. This includes DC/DC Converter circuitry, alarm circuitry, tuning motor drivers and communication interfaces. The Control Board contains two microcontrollers: Communication and Tuning Microcontroller VSWR Microcontroller.

14.4.3.1 Communication and Tuning Microcontroller

The Communication and Tuning Microcontroller handles communication and cavity tuning as performed by the Forem RTC microcontrollers.

14.4.3.2 VSWR Microcontroller

The VSWR Microcontroller is used to monitor the VSWR at the RTC output.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

185 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.5 GSM RTC Extension/Modularity

The GSM extension RTCs (FREG and CREG) extend the basic RTCs (FRBG and CRBG) from four to eight cavities. (The Forem and Celwave components cannot be mixed). Connection between the basic and extension RTC is achieved using cables supplied with the extension RTC. No new software or electronics is required. The new cavities, however, must be initially parked; already installed cavities (in the basic RTC) can remain in position.

14.6 Adjustments and Configuration

The following configuration and operational adjustments can be made: Initial cavity tuning Operational periodic tuning.

14.6.1 Initial Cavity Tuning

Initial cavity tuning is performed in two stages: Coarse tuning After initial power up, cavities are coarse tuned to center frequencies defined during initialization at the factory. During coarse tuning, RF power must not be applied from the transmitters. Fine tuning. After coarse tuning, RF power can be applied and fine tuning automatically begins. The microcontroller uses feedback information from the Tuning Detector.

14.6.2 Operational Periodic Tuning

Operational periodic tuning is performed once the RTC is initialized and operating. This ensures continued accuracy.

186 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.7 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the RTCs. The following information is provided: LEDs Power Supply Grounding Performance Characteristics.

14.7.1 LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs on the RTC front panels. LED Power ON VSWR0 VSWR1 Description Lit when power is present. Lit if VSWR exceeds threshold setting on the front panel. Lit if VSWR is very high.

Table 57: RTC LED Descriptions

14.7.2 Power Supply

The RTC requires an input voltage of -48/-60 VDC (nominal), 1.5 A maximum.

14.7.3 Grounding
Thorough grounding is ensured through the use of a connection between the submodule(s) and the cabinet. In addition, all surfaces connected together are coated with a conductive lacquer.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

187 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.7.4 Performance Characteristics

The performance characteristics of the RTCs are shown in the following table. Parameter Number of cavities: GSM 900 4 - basic RTC only 8 - basic and extension RTC Number of channels: Channel numbers: Tunable frequency range: Cavity bandwidth for each channel (0.5 dB): Parking position: Minimum cavity spacing: Maximum power at each transmitter input: Insertion loss 4 Cavities: 8 Cavities: Group delay: Input return loss: Output return loss: Input Isolation between transmitter inputs: Intermodulation products in band 100 kHz 12.75 GHz (receive band excluded) exited in RTC, transmitters at max. power: Intermodulation products in receive band: RF input impedance: RF output impedance: Output return loss of RTE test loop: Coupling factor between Transmit Module input and RTE output: Table 58: RTC Performance Characteristics 174 0 - 124 and 975 - 1023 925 - 960 MHz >160 kHz > 962 MHz 600 kHz 60 W 3.6 dB max 4.4 dB max < 150 ns > 20 dB > 8 dB > 43 dB < 75 dBc GSM 1800 4 - RC4D 8 - RC8D 374 512 - 885 1805 - 1880 MHz >170 kHz > 1882 MHz 600 kHz 40 W max 2.5 dB to 5.0 dB 2.5 dB to 5.5 dB < 150 ns > 18 dB > 8 dB > 38 dB > 75 dBc

< 100 dBm 50 Ohm 50 Ohm > 14 dB 37.5 +/- 1 dB

< 100 dBm 50 Ohm 50 Ohm > 14 dB 37.5 +/- 1 dB

188 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.8 Physical Description

The RTC submodules are open-box assemblies designed for rack mounting. Individual components are interconnected by screened cables inside the box. This section describes the physical details of the RTC. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panels Rear Views Front Panel Connectors.

14.8.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the RTC submodules are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Celwave GSM 900: Forem GSM 900: GSM 1800: Size (Units) 4U 19" Size (mm) 177.8 mm 482.6 mm 340 mm 345 mm 345 mm

Table 59: RTC Physical Dimensions

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

189 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.8.1.1 FRBG Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the FRBG. It includes RF and local control connectors, control switches and indication LEDs.
DC/DC Converter with Heat sink and Power ON LED Alarm LEDs and RS232/ VSWR DCL2 Level Selector Selector RF Extension Connection (behind front blanking plate) Antenna RF Output High Voltage Warning Label

Fixing Holes ANT OUT Q1 Equipment Labels L o c a l VSWR 0 1 1.5 1.7 1.9 OFF Blanking RS232 Power Plate Connector Switch TX1 TX3 RTE

TX2

TX4

Fixing Holes

Transmitter RF Inputs

Test Loop Output

Figure 50: FRBG Front Panel

14.8.1.2 FRBG Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view of the FRBG including internal extension, Station Unit, DCL2 and power connectors.
Interface to Interconnection Station Unit FRBG to FREG Fixing Holes TO SCFE TO EXTENSION

Q1 IN Q1 OUT

LINE1 LINE2

Fixing Holes DCL2 Connections Q1 IN Q1 OUT Power Supply Connectors LINE1, LINE2 Ground Tag

Figure 51: FRBG Rear View

190 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.8.1.3 FREG Front Panel

The figure below shows the FREG front panel. It includes the DC/DC converter, the RF extension connection, and the transmitter RF inputs.
DC/DC Converter with Heat sink and Power ON LED Fixing Holes RF Extension Connection (behind front blanking plate)

TX7 Equipment Labels TX5 Fixing Holes Blanking Plates

TX8

TX6

Transmitter RF Inputs

Figure 52: FREG Front Panel

14.8.1.4 FREG Rear View

The rear view of the FREG is shown below, including FRBG to FREG interconnection.
Fixing Holes

EXTENSION

Interconnection FRBG to FREG

Ground Tag

Fixing Holes

Figure 53: FREG Rear View

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

191 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.8.1.5 Forem RC4D Front Panel

The front of the Forem RC4D is shown in the following figure. It includes RF and local control connectors, control switches and indication LEDs.
RS232 Connector and RS232/DCL 2 Selector

DC/DC Converter with Heat sink and Power ON LED

Alarm LEDs and VSWR Level Selector

Transmitter RF Inputs

Antenna RF Output

Fixing Holes

Q1 L o c a l

VSWR

0 1

TX4
1.5 1.7 1.9

TX2

ANT OUT

Equipment Labels ON Fixing Holes Power Switch

High Voltage Warning Label

TX3

TX1

OFF

RTE

Test Loop Output

Figure 54: Forem RC4D Front Panel

14.8.1.6 Forem RC8D Front Panel

The Forem RC8D front panel is shown in the following figure. It is similar to the RC4D panel.
RS232 Connector and RS232/DCL 2 Selector Alarm LEDs and VSWR Level Selector Transmitter RF Inputs

DC/DC Converter with Heat sink and Power ON LED

Antenna RF Output

Fixing Holes

Q1 L o c a l

VSWR 0 1

TX8
1.5 1.7 1.9

TX6

TX4

TX2

ANT OUT

Equipment Labels ON Fixing Holes Power Switch

High Voltage Warning Label

TX7 OFF

TX5

TX3

TX1

RTE

Test Loop Output

Figure 55: Forem RC8D Front Panel

192 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.8.1.7 Forem RC4D/RC8D Rear View

The rear view of the Forem RC4D/RC8D is shown in the following figure, including connectors and the interface to the Station Unit.
Power Supply Interface to Connectors LINE1, LINE2 Station Unit Fixing Holes
LINE1 LINE2 TO SCFE Q1 IN Q1 OUT

DCL2 Connections Q1 IN Q1 OUT

Fixing Holes Ground Tag

Figure 56: Forem RC4D/RC8D Rear View

14.8.1.8 CRBG Front Panel

The CRBG front panel is shown in the figure below. It shows the RF connectors, alarm and indicator LEDs, control switches and the warning and equipment labels.
Control Board Power Switch and LED Indicator
ON OFF TX4

Coupling RF Output Connection (behind front blanking plate)

Transmitter RF Inputs
TX1 TX2

RS232/ DCL2 Selector Equipment Labels Alarm LEDs and VSWR Level Selector

POWER ON

Fixing Holes

Q1 LOCAL VSWR 1 VSWR 0 1.9 1.7 1.5

ANT OUT

High Voltage Warning Label Fixing Holes

TX3

RTE
LOCAL

RS232 Transmitter Connector RF Inputs

Antenna RF Output

Test Loop Output

Figure 57: CRBG Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

193 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.8.1.9 CRBG Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view of the CRBG including internal extension, Station Unit, DCL2 and power connectors.
DCL2 Connections Q1 IN, Q1 OUT Fixing Holes Power Supply Connectors LINE1, LINE2

LINE1 LINE2 Q1 IN Q1 OUT SCFE DET 5 8 EXT MOT + OPTO Interconnection CRBG to CREG (tuning control and power)

Fixing Holes Interface to Station Unit Interconnection CRBG to CREG (tuning detector connections) Ground Tag

Figure 58: CRBG Rear View

14.8.1.10 CREG Front Panel

The figure below shows the CREG front panel, including RF connectors and equipment labels.
Coupling RF Output Connection (behind front blanking plate) Fixing Holes TX8 TX5

Equipment Labels TX7 Fixing Holes Transmitter RF Inputs Transmitter RF Inputs TX6

Figure 59: CREG Front Panel

194 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.8.1.11 CREG Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view of the CREG, which has pre-equipped power and data extension cables.
Fixing Holes Preequipped extension cabling

Fixing Holes Ground Tag

Figure 60: CREG Rear View

14.8.1.12 Celwave RC4D Front Panel

The Celwave RC4D front panel is shown in the figure below. It includes the power switch, LED indicator, control switches and connectors, as well as equipment labels.
Power Switch and LED Indicator Alarm LEDs and RS232 VSWR Connector Level Selector VSWR0
1.9 1.5 1.7

RS232/ DCL2 Selector

Q1 LOCAL

Test Loop Output

Antenna RF Output

Fixing Holes
ON

POWER ON OFF

VSWR1

LOCAL

TEST

ANT

Equipment Labels TX4 Fixing Holes Transmitter RF Inputs TX2 TX1

High Voltage Warning Label

TX3

Figure 61: Celwave RC4D Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

195 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.8.1.13 Celwave RC8D Front Panel

The following figure shows the Celwave RC8D front panel. It is similar to the RC4D front panel, except that it has eight RF input connectors instead of four.
Power Switch and LED Indicator Alarm LEDs and VSWR Level Selector

RS232/ DCL2 Selector

RS232 Connector

Test Antenna Loop RF Output Output

Fixing Holes
ON

POWER VSWR0 ON Q1 LOCAL 1.9 1.5 OFF VSWR1

1.7

LOCAL

TEST

ANT

Equipment Labels TX8 Fixing Holes Transmitter RF Inputs TX7 TX6 TX4 TX2 TX1

High Voltage Warning Label

TX5

TX3

Figure 62: Celwave RC8D Front Panel

14.8.1.14 Celwave RC4D/RC8D Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view of the RC4D/RC8D RITS, including the connectors and interface to the Station Unit.
DCL2 Connections Q1 IN, Q1 OUT Fixing Holes
Q1 OUT Q1 IN

Interface to Station Unit

SCFE

Power Supply Connectors PS1, PS2

PS2 PS1

Fixing Holes Ground Tag

Figure 63: Celwave RC4D/RC8D Rear View

196 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

14.8.2 Front Panel Connectors

The FRBG, CRBG, RC4D and RC8D have front panel connectors for transmitter inputs, RTE probe output and antenna output. The FREG and CREG only have front panel connectors for the transmitter inputs. The FRBG, CRBG, RC4D and RC8D also have a front panel RS-232 connector. The following table shows the pin assignments. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Signal NC Receive Transmit Shorted to 6 GND Pin 6 7 8 9 Signal Shorted to 4 Shorted to 8 Shorted to 7 NC -

Table 60: FRBG/CRBG/RC4D/RC8D RS-232 Front Panel Connector NC = Not Connected

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

197 / 288

14 CRBG/CREG/FRBG/FREG/RC4D/RC8D

198 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG
This chapter provides a detailed description of the WBC.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

199 / 288

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.1 Introduction
The WBC (Wide Band Combiner) combines RF signals from up to two transmitters to a common output for transmission via a single antenna. In addition, it isolates incoming RF signals and produces status information. The WBC also monitors forward and reflected RF output power for antenna/cable fault checking. This type of combiner is more compact than an RTC and is suitable for use in low capacity BTSs.

15.1.1 WBC Types

There are three WBC types, the use of which depends on system type and the capacity of the BTS: WBC Types WB2D Variant 3BK 01628 AAAA (Forem) 3BK 01628 AABA (Celwave) WB1G 3BK 01625 AAAA (Forem) 3BK 01625 AABA (Celwave) WB2G 3BK 01626 AAAA (Forem) 3BK 01626 AABA (Celwave)

For each WBC type there are two variants, from different manufacturers: one carrier and two carrier. There is no functional difference between the WBC variants from the two manufacturers, although internal construction detail can differ. A two-channel WBC can be used with only one carrier; however, this configuration results in reduced transmission power at the antenna.

15.1.2 DUPG/DUPD
The DUPD (3BK 01633 AAAA (Forem)) and DUPG (3BK 01634 AAAA (Forem)) provide all the functions of the two-channel WBCs, but also duplex transmit and receive RF signals. This allows one antenna to be used for both transmission and non-diversity reception.

200 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.1.3 DUD2
The DUD2 (3BK 07507 AAAA) (Forem) has two separate single-channel transmitter paths. The RF transmission carriers, from the two antennas, are combined in the air. This saves the 3.5 dB loss, normally incurred when conventional wideband combiners are used. The first transmitter path has a transmitter filter, the second has a duplexer. The duplexer provides a coupling function of the transmit and receive signals, allowing one antenna to be used for both directions. The transmitter filter only provides a transmit path. Thus, the DUD2 can provide the option of high-power operation, by using a second antenna.

Note:

References to the WBC include all variants of WBC and DUPD/DUPG unless otherwise stated. As shown in the following diagrams, the WBC and DUPD/DUPG differ slightly in design.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

201 / 288

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.1.4 WBC
Transmitter 1 Isolator with Power Load Summing Network Transmitter 2 Isolator with Power Load Transmitter Module

Transmitter Filter

Transmit Antenna

Antenna Directional Coupler

Radio Test Equipment Unit DCS

Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit

Station Unit

Simulator

Station Unit

Figure 64: WBC Block Diagram

202 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.1.5 DUPD/DUPG
The DUPD/DUPG are similar to the WBC. However, its duplexer combines both transmit and receive paths onto one antenna connection.

Isolator

RFE

Transmitter 1

Isolator with Power Load Summing Network

TransmitReceive Module RTE

Duplexer

Antenna Directional Coupler

Transmitter 2

Isolator with Power Load Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit

Antenna

Simulator

Station Unit

Figure 65: DUPD/DUPG Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

203 / 288

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.1.6 DUD2
The DUD2 differs from the other WBCs, in that it has two antenna connections for separate transmitter paths.
TX Module

Transmitter 2

Isolator with Power Load

Transmitter Filter

Directional Coupler

Antenna 2

Antenna VSWR Detector

Isolator

Receiver Frontend

TransmitReceive Module Transmitter 1 Isolator with Power Load

Duplexer

Antenna Directional Coupler

Antenna 1

Antenna VSWR Detector

Control Board Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit BCCH Switch Simulator DC/DC Converter Alarm Simulator

Station Unit

Figure 66: DUD2 Block Diagram

204 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.2 WBC Functional Blocks

The WBC functional blocks consist of the following internal components: Isolator with power load Summing network Transmitter Module (WBC and DUD2) Transmit-Receive Module (DUPD/DUPG/DUD2) Simulator. The WBC components are described in the following sections.

15.2.1 Isolator with Power Load

Isolators are used to improve isolation between transmitters, thereby reducing signal intermodulation products. They also help to avoid interference from the antenna by preventing intermodulation of the corresponding transmitter signal. The RF input signals from the transmitter(s) enter the Isolator(s) via front panel connectors. The Isolator is connected to a power load, mounted on a heat sink. If an excessive VSWR condition occurs at the output of the WBC it absorbs part of the reflected power. Thus, even if a short circuit occurs at the WBC output, there is no component damage. (See "Transmitter Module" which describes the Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit.) The load can withstand the maximum reflected power for at least one minute (short at output). During this time the antenna VSWR1 alarm causes the BTS to switch off the RF power.

15.2.2 Summing Network

The broadband Summing Network combines the incoming signals from the two isolator output lines. The network operates over the whole downlink band without needing to tune the used channels. The output is fed to the Transmitter Module.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

205 / 288

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.2.3 Transmitter Module (WBC and DUD2)

The WBC Transmitter Module consists of the following parts: Transmitter Filter Antenna Directional Coupler Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit.

15.2.3.1 Transmitter Filter

The Transmitter Filter suppresses noise in the transmitter spectrum. It also reduces intermodulation caused by the transmitter in the uplink band (according to GSM rec. 11.20). Additional rejection of harmonics from the transmitters is achieved with this filter.

15.2.3.2 Antenna Directional Coupler

The Antenna Directional Coupler samples forward and reflected power at the antenna connector. It does this to measure the return loss of the antenna. The coupler is linked to the RTE connector for performing BTS baseband and radio path tests. The RTE can be used to test a real traffic channel under frequency hopping conditions, or a single BTS Transceiver.

15.2.3.3 Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit

The Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit continuously monitors forward and reflected power by means of two detectors connected to the antenna directional coupler. Forward and reflected power values are processed and compared. Alarms are generated if the VSWR exceeds preset limits: VSWR0 is raised when the VSWR exceeds a limit preselected via the VSWR switch on the front panel. This condition causes the VSWR0 red LED indicator to light. An RF output signal is still present, with some signal deterioration, and the antenna and cables must be inspected for damage VSWR1 is raised when the VSWR exceeds a higher, pre-defined limit. Serious deterioration of transmission quality of the RF output signal causes the VSWR1 red LED indicator to light. This indicates that the antenna or the cable is broken, and the WBC can be damaged by too much reflected power being dissipated in the power load.

15.2.4 Transmit-Receive Module (DUPD/DUPG/DUD2)

The DUPD/DUPG/DUD2 Transceiver (TRX) Module contains all the functions of the TX Module. However, the DUPD/DUPG/DUD2 have a duplexer which allows the additional function of coupling received signals from the antenna to the receiver input.

15.2.4.1 Duplexer
The DUD2 TRX Module contains a Duplexer unit, which allows the downlink and uplink radio signals to be transmitted/received via the same antenna.

206 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.2.4.2 DUD2 Antenna Connections

There are two antenna connections (ANT1 and ANT2) on the DUD2 and, therefore, there are two LED alarm indicators for each connector.

Note:

The ANT1 antenna connection provides a bidirectional signal path; ANT2 provides a transmit-only signal path.

15.2.5 Simulator
The simulator emulates RTC functions. RTCs contain a BCCH switch and a DC/DC converter alarm. For BTS equipment compatibility, the BCCH-Carrier Switch and DC/DC Converter functions are simulated in WBC types.

15.2.5.1 BCCH-Switch Simulator

The BCCH-Switch Simulator simulates the behavior of the RF switch in an RTC. It does this by means of electronic switching, sending the appropriate response message back to the Station Unit.

15.2.5.2 DC/DC Converter Alarm Simulator

The DC/DC Converter Alarm Simulator ensures that DC/DC converter alarms are not raised at the Station Unit. The DC/DC Converter is not present in the WBC.

15.2.6 Control Board (DUD2)

The Control Board contains the DUD2 alarm and control functions. This includes the Antenna VSWR Alarm Unit, BCCH-Switch Simulator and the DC/DC Converter Alarm Simulator. Alarms The VSWR Alarm Unit monitors the reflected power on the TCH. The alarm operates above the threshold selected on the DUD2 front panel. If the maximum permitted power level is exceeded, an alarm is raised. There is no alarm if the reflected power falls below the minimum level. A three-second delay is implemented, before the alarm is flagged to the Station Unit.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

207 / 288

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.3 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the WBCs. The following information is provided: LEDs Power Supply Performance Characteristics.

15.3.1 LEDs
All the modules have the same LED indicators. The following table describes the LEDs on the units front panels. LED VSWR0 Description This LED is lit if the VSWR exceeds the specified threshold (set with the rotary switch on the front panel). This LED is lit (in addition to VSWR0) if the VSWR exceeds a threshold of 2.5 (+/- 0.5).

VSWR1

Table 61: WBC LED Descriptions

208 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.3.2 Power Supply

The WBCs require no specific power supply; all supplies for signalling purposes are taken direct from the Station Unit.

15.3.3 Performance Characteristics

The performance characteristics of the WBC are shown in the following table. Forem and Celwave variants are identical. Parameter Transmit band: Power for each transmitter channel input: Number of channels: Channel numbers: Bandwidth for each channel: Insertion loss for each channel (A 0 ): Group delay: Input return loss: Output return loss: Isolation between WBC inputs: Intermodulation products in band 100 kHz - 12.5 GHz (receive band excluded) excited in WBC at max. transmit power: GSM 900 925 - 960 MHz 40 W maximum 174 0 - 124 and 975 - 1023 200 kHz [le ] 5.2 dB [le ] 100 ns > 21 dB > 15 dB > 48 dB > 75 dBc GSM 1800 1805 - 1880 MHz 40 W maximum 374 512 - 885 200 kHz [le ] 5.2 dB [le ] 100 ns > 21 dB > 15 dB > 45 dB > 75 dBc

Intermodulation products in receive band excited [le ] -105 dBm in WBC measured with 2 x maximum power: Coupling attenuation of test loop: RF input impedance: RF output impedance: Return loss at the test loop output: Table 62: WBC Performance Characteristics 37.5 +/- 1 dB 50 Ohm 50 Ohm [le ] 14 dB

[le ] -105 dBm

37.5 +/- 1 dB 50 Ohm 50 Ohm [le ] 14 dB

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

209 / 288

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.4 Physical Description

The WBCs are open box assemblies, designed for plug-in installation; they are secured by screws. Individual components are interconnected by screened cables inside the box. This section describes the physical details of the WBC. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panels Connectors Rear Views.

15.4.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the WBC submodules are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: WBC/DUPD/DUD2: DUPG: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 1U 2U 19" Size (mm) 43.6 mm 87.2 mm 482.6 mm 347.5 mm

Table 63: WBC Physical Dimensions

15.4.2 Front Panels

15.4.2.1 Forem WBC Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the Forem WBC, including RF connectors, control switches and indication LEDs.
Fixing Holes ANT
1,5 1,7 1,9

Equipment Labels VSWR

VSWR1

Test Connector RTE ANT

High Voltage Warning Label TX2 TX1

Fixing Holes

VSWR0

VSWR LEDs Switch

Antenna Output Connector

Transmitter Input Connector(s)

Figure 67: Forem WBC Front Panel

210 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.4.2.2 Celwave WBC Front Panel

The figure below shows the Celwave WBC front panel. It is similar to the Forem WBC front panel.
Fixing Holes
VSWR1 VSWR0 1,9 1,7 1,5

Equipment Labels

Test Connector RTE

High Voltage Warning Label ANT OUT TX2 TX1

Fixing Holes

LEDs

VSWR Switch

Antenna Output Connector

Transmitter Input Connector(s) (TX2 Not Present on WBIG variant)

Figure 68: Celwave WBC Front Panel

15.4.2.3 DUPD Front Panel

The following figure shows the DUPD front panel. It is similar to the Forem and Celwave WBC front panels with RF connectors, control switches and indication LEDs.
Fixing Holes
ANT
1,5 1,7

Equipment Labels
VSWR
1,9 VSWR1

Test Connector RX RTE ANT OUT

High Voltage Warning Label TX2 TX1

Fixing Holes

VSWR0

VSWR LEDs Switch

Receiver Output Connector

Antenna Output Connector

Transmitter Input Connector(s)

Figure 69: DUPD Front Panel

15.4.2.4 DUD2 Front Panel

The DUD2 front panel is shown in the figure below. It is similar to the Forem/Celwave WBC and DUPD front panels.
Fixing Holes
ANT VSWR1 ANT1 VSWR0 VSWR

Equipment Labels
1,5 1,7 1,9 VSWR1 ANT2 VSWR0

Receiver Output Connector TX1 RX1 ANT1 TX2

High Voltage Warning Label ANT2

Fixing Holes

LEDs VSWR Switch

LEDs

Transmitter 1 Input Connector

Antenna 1 Output Connector

Transmitter 2 Input Connector

Antenna 2 Output Connector

Figure 70: DUD2 Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

211 / 288

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.4.2.5 DUPG Front Panel

The DUPG front panel is shown in the following figure. Like the other WBC front panels, it includes indication LEDs, control switches, and connectors.
Fixing Holes Equipment Labels Fixing Holes

ANT
1,5 1,7

VSWR
1,9 VSWR1

RX

RTE

ANT OUT

TX2

TX1

VSWR0

VSWR Switch

LEDs

Receiver Output Connector

Test Connector

Antenna Output Connector

High Voltage Warning Label

Transmitter Input Connector(s)

Figure 71: DUPG Front Panel

15.4.3 Front Panel Connectors

The WBCs have front panel RF connectors for transmitter inputs, an RTE (except DUD2) probe output and the antenna.

212 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

15.4.4 Rear Views

15.4.4.1 WBC/DUPD Rear View
The three figures below show the rear views of the WBC/DUPD, DUD2, and DUPG. They all contain a heat sink, ground(s) and a Station Unit connector.

123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 Heat sink 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890

Figure 72: WBC/DUPD Rear View

Ground (Celwave)

Station Unit Ground Connector (Forem)

15.4.4.2 DUD2 Rear View

123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 Heat sink 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890

Station Unit Connector

Ground

Figure 73: DUD2 Rear View

15.4.4.3 DUPG Rear View

123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 Heat sink 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890

Figure 74: DUPG Rear View

Ground (Celwave)

Station Unit Ground Connector (Forem)

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

213 / 288

15 WB3D/WB1G/WB2G/DUPD/DUD2/DUPG

214 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

16 ADPS

16 ADPS
This chapter provides a detailed description of the ADPS.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

215 / 288

16 ADPS

16.1 Introduction
The ADPS (AC/DC Power Supply) is used in BTSs where only Alternating Current is available. It is supplied with mains AC power which it converts to DC for use by the BTS DC/DC power supply submodules. The ADPS is capable of supplying power to other BTS units which require a -48 VDC supply. Under all load conditions, the ADPS can accept hot insertion of loads, and the application and removal of its input supply. Variants There are two variants of ADPS: 3BK 01917 AAAA (Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Communication) 3BK 01917 ABBA (Alcatel-Lucent Converters). Both variants are functionally equivalent; however, their internal design is different.

Note:

The Alcatel-Lucent Converters ADPS requires additional forced cooling. This is supplied by use of a CFUA.

216 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

16 ADPS

16.2 Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Communications ADPS Functions

The Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Communications ADPS contains the following functional blocks: Common Mode Choke AC/DC Converter Power factor and switch-on control Battery inhibit control Filter DC/DC Converters Capacitor-Choke-Capacitor Filter Inhibit control Output Voltage Monitor and alarm circuit.
DC/DC Converter (24 V) 24 V 24 VDC 230 VAC 50 Hz (fused) Common Mode Choke AC/DC Converter LED "AC IN" Supervisory Signals Control Power Factor and Switch ON Battery Inhibit Control GND DC/DC Converter (24 V) Inhibit Control Capacitor Choke Capacitor Filter Output Voltage Monitor and Alarm 48 VDC ALMADPS INHADPS Front Panel Switch

GND

Filter

INHBBU

ALMADPS INHBBU INHADPS

ADPS Alarm Inhibit Battery Backup Unit Inhibit ADPS

LED "ON"

Figure 75: Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Communications ADPS Block Diagram

16.2.1 Common Mode Choke

The Common Mode Choke filters high frequency noise from the fused 230 VAC mains supply. The presence of the supply voltage is indicated by the input supply LED, marked "AC-IN".

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

217 / 288

16 ADPS

16.2.2 AC/DC Converter

The AC/DC Converter converts the input voltage from AC to 24 VDC. It also generates supervisory signals to indicate that the input voltage and power factor are within the permitted limits.

16.2.3 Power Factor and Switch-on Control

The Power Factor and Switch-on Control block monitors the supervisory signals. If the supply fails, the changeover process to the standby battery is initiated. Signals are sent to the Battery Inhibit Control and DC/DC Converters.

16.2.4 Battery Inhibit Control

The Battery Inhibit Control block generates the Inhibit Battery Backup Unit (INHBBU) signal. This is used to switch to backup power. The LED "ON" indicates the operational status of the ADPS. When the ADPS is operational, the LED marked "ON" is lit. If the supply fails, the LED "ON" is extinguished.

16.2.5 Filter
The Filter smooths the DC output from the AC/DC Converter. The filter also acts as an energy store. It can supply maximum power during a changeover to backup power, after a supply failure.

16.2.6 DC/DC Converters

The two DC/DC Converters each produce a -24 VDC output. They are connected in series to give a -48 VDC total output.

16.2.7 Capacitor-Choke-Capacitor Filter

The Capacitor-Choke-Capacitor Filter smooths the DC-voltage output from the DC/DC Converters.

16.2.8 Inhibit Control

The Inhibit Control switches the ADPS on and off. The ADPS can be switched off remotely by the Inhibit ADPS signal. The switch-off signal initiates the changeover process to the standby battery. The DC/DC Converters are then switched off. The ADPS can be locally switched on or off through a front panel switch.

16.2.9 Output Voltage Monitor and Alarm Circuit

The Output Voltage Monitor and Alarm Circuit monitors the DC output voltage level from the DC/DC Converters. If an overvoltage or undervoltage condition occurs, the alarm, ADPS Alarm, is raised and sent to the Station Unit.

218 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

16 ADPS

16.3 Alcatel-Lucent Converters ADPS Functions

The Alcatel-Lucent Converters ADPS contains the following functional blocks: Input Filter Inrush Current Protector AC/DC Converter DC/DC Converter Output Filter Converter control Overvoltage protection Output voltage/current limitation Output Voltage Monitor Undervoltage for AC/DC Converter Power Fail Monitor.
Power Fail Monitor

INHBBU

230 VAC 50 Hz (fused)

Input Filter

Inrush Current Protector

AC/DC Converter

DC/DC Converter

Output Filter

48 VDC

LED "ACIN"

Undervoltage for AC/DC Converter

Overvoltage Protection

Converter Control

Output Voltage/ Current Regulation

Front Panel Switch

Output Voltage Monitor

ALMADPS LED "On" INHADPS

Figure 76: Alcatel-Lucent Converters ADPS Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

219 / 288

16 ADPS

16.3.1 Input Filter

The Input Filter removes noise from the fused 230 VAC mains supply. The presence of the supply voltage is indicated by the input supply LED, marked "AC-IN".

16.3.2 Inrush Current Protector

The Inrush Current Protector limits power-on surge current. This prevents sudden load changes on the input supply and protects the ADPS components.

16.3.3 AC/DC Converter

The AC/DC Converter converts the 230 AC input voltage to high level DC. The output is fed to the DC/DC Converter and the supervisory functions.

16.3.4 DC/DC Converter

The DC/DC Converter produces a -48 VDC output from the high level AC/DC Converter output.

16.3.5 Output Filter

The Output Filter smooths the output from the DC/DC Converter. This power output is fed to the BTS components. The Output Filter also acts as a short-term reservoir to supply power during changeover to a backup power-supply.

16.3.6 Converter Control

The Converter Control functions control the operational state of the DC/DC converter, managing the orderly start-up of the converter at power-up. The DC/DC converter is shut down if input power is not available or the AC/DC Converter output fails. The ADPS can be switched off remotely by the INHADPS signal. The switch off signal initiates the changeover process to the standby battery. The DC/DC Converters are then switched off. The ADPS can be locally switched on or off through a front panel switch.

220 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

16 ADPS

16.3.7 Overvoltage Protection

The Overvoltage Protection block monitors the output from the ADPS. If the output exceeds the maximum, an alarm signal is sent to the Converter Control functions.

16.3.8 Output Voltage/Current Limitation

The Output Voltage and Current Limitation functions are responsible for monitoring the output voltage and current levels. If the output voltage, or current, exceeds the operational maximum, an alarm is sent to the Converter Control functions.

16.3.9 Output Voltage Monitor

The Output Voltage Monitor monitors the output from the ADPS. During normal operation, the LED "ON" is lit. If the output voltage falls outside the permitted operational range, the ALMADPS alarm is raised and the LED is extinguished.

16.3.10 Undervoltage for AC/DC Converter

The Undervoltage for AC/DC Converter block monitors the output of the AC/DC Converter and the output signal from the Overvoltage Monitor. If the monitored signals fall outside their normal operational ranges, an alarm signal is sent to the Converter Control functions.

16.3.11 Power Fail Monitor

The Power Fail Monitor generates the INHBBU signal. This is used to switch backup power if the AC/DC Converter output fails.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

221 / 288

16 ADPS

16.4 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the ADPS. The following information is provided: LEDs Power Supply (input) Output Characteristics.

16.4.1 LEDs
The following table describes each LED on the units front panels. LED ON AC IN Description Lit when DC power is present on the output. Lit when AC power is present on the input.

Table 64: ADPS LED Descriptions

16.4.2 Power Supply

The ADPS works with an AC input voltage of 230 VAC +/- 15 %. The frequency of the input supply is 48 Hz - 62 Hz. This supply is fed into the ADPS module via a fuse and a common mode choke. No damage is incurred if an input supply voltage from 0 V to 195 VAC and of frequency from 45 Hz to 65 Hz is applied to the ADPS. In the event of non-periodic transients occurring, the ADPS functions normally and without interruptions. If the input voltage falls at any time below 40 % of the nominal value (92 VAC), the ADPS switches OFF. When the input voltage increases again (above a higher level) the ADPS is automatically reactivated. The ADPS is designed to limit harmonic distortion of the input current.

222 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

16 ADPS

16.4.3 Output Characteristics

The following table lists the basic output characteristics of the ADPS. Characteristic Voltage Current Value -48 VDC nominal (in range: -40.5 VDC to -57 VDC). 12 A maximum.

Table 65: ADPS Basic Output Characteristics The following table shows the dynamic response of the ADPS to steps in load current. Voltage Range Load Step +/- 2.4 A +/- 2.4 A +/- 4.8 A +/- 4.8 A From -45.6 VDC -47.76 VDC -40.5 VDC -47.76 VDC To -50.4 VDC -48.24 VDC -57.0 VDC -48.24 VDC Transition Period < 3 ms > 3 ms < 100 ms > 100 ms

Table 66: ADPS Dynamic Response The ADPS is designed to withstand no-load or short-circuit conditions.

16.5 Physical Description

The ADPS assembly comprises a multilayer board, fixed to the front panel. A multi-way connector is mounted at the rear. Indication LEDs, the input supply connector and the on-off switch are fitted to the front panel. The switch is fitted in a recess to prevent accidental operation. The fuse for the input supply is mounted in the ADPS assembly and is not accessible while the ADPS is fitted in the subrack. This section describes the physical details of the ADPS. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panel Rear View.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

223 / 288

16 ADPS

16.5.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the ADPS are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 10 T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 50.8 mm 280 mm

Table 67: ADPS Physical Dimensions

16.5.2 Front Panel

The following figure shows the ADPS front panel, including the On/Off switch and input supply connector.
Fixing Holes

Warning Label

Handle

Equipment Labels ON

Output LED (GREEN) Input LED (GREEN)

AC IN

ON Input Supply Connector OFF

Power Switch

Fixing Holes

Figure 77: ADPS Front Panel

224 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

16 ADPS

16.5.3 Rear View

The figure below shows a rear view of the ADPS and its rear connectors.
Fixing Holes

Rear Connector

Fixing Holes

Figure 78: ADPS Rear View

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

225 / 288

16 ADPS

226 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 MBPS/FCPS

17 MBPS/FCPS
This chapter provides a detailed description of the DC/DC power supplies.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

227 / 288

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.1 Introduction
The MBPS and FCPS are similar units. They produce the different voltages, and current, required by all the submodules in a Mini-BTS Subrack. They are derived from a DC input supply of -48/-60 VDC (nominal). The FCPS produces the different voltages and current required by one Frame Unit and one Carrier Unit. There are three autonomous parts in the MBPS, and two in the FCPS. Each are completely independent parts, supplying power to one of the modules: Station Unit (MBPS only) Carrier Unit Frame Unit. The MBPS also supplies power to other boards fitted within the MBSR.

17.2 DC/DC Power Supplies Functions

The MBPS and FCPS contain the following functional blocks: Input Filter and Monitor Auxiliary and monitor circuits DC/DC converters Output supervision Carrier Unit Alarm Controller (FCPS and MBPS only).

228 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.2.1 MBPS
A block diagram of the MBPS is shown below.
LED "FU"

LED "ON" Fuse "FU" T4A

DC/DC Converter Front Panel Switch "FU"

Output Supervision

+5 VFU Frame Unit ALMFU Station Unit

48/60 VDC

Input Filter and Monitor

Auxiliary and Monitor Circuit

Remote On/Off INHMSPS Fuse "CU" T10A DC/DC Converter Output Supervision +26 VCU

Auxiliary and Monitor Circuit Remote On/Off INHMSPS Front Panel Switch "CU"

Output Supervision

+12 VCU Carrier Unit

Output Supervision

12 VCU

Output Supervision

+5 VCU

Carrier Unit Alarm Controller Fuse "SU" T10A DC/DC Converter

Station Unit ALMCU

LED "SU"

LED "CU"

Output Supervision

+5 VSU TC16 +5 VSU Station Unit

Auxiliary and Monitor Circuit Remote On/Off INHMSPS Front Panel Switch "SU"

Output Supervision

+12 VSU ALMSU

Figure 79: MBPS Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

229 / 288

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.2.2 FCPS
A block diagram of the FCPS is shown below.
LED "FU" +5 VFU LED "ON" Fuse "FU" T4A Fuse "CU" T10A Auxiliary and Monitor Circuit DC/DC Converter Front Panel Switch "FU" Output Supervision ALMFU Frame Unit Station Unit

48/60 VDC

Input Filter and Monitor

Remote On/Off INHMSPS +26 VCU DC/DC Converter Output Supervision

+12 VCU Auxiliary and Monitor Circuit Remote On/Off INHMSPS Front Panel Switch "CU" Output Supervision Carrier Unit 12 VCU Output Supervision

+5 VCU Output Supervision

Carrier Station Unit Unit Alarm Controller ALMCU

LED "CU"

Figure 80: FCPS Block Diagram

230 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.2.3 Input Filter and Monitor

The Input Filter and Monitor functional block is the first stage of the power supply circuitry. It is fed from a -48/-60 VDC (nominal) supply.

17.2.3.1 Fuses
The inputs are protected by fuses, which are conveniently located on the power supply units front panels. The fuse values for the various units are as follows: T4 A for the Frame Unit T10 A for the Carrier Unit T10 A for the Station Unit (MBPS only). The presence of the supply voltage is indicated by the input supply LED, marked "ON".

17.2.3.2 Filter
The supply is filtered before being fed to each autonomous part of the power supply units. Input polarity-reversal protection is provided.

17.2.4 Auxiliary and Monitor Circuits

The Auxiliary and Monitor Circuits continuously monitor the input voltage. If it falls below the minimum level of -34.4 VDC, the DC/DC Converters are shut down. If the voltage is subsequently restored above the level of -38.4 VDC, the DC/DC Converters are reactivated. Front panel switches allow the supplies to be manually switched on and off. The outputs can also be controlled remotely, provided that the associated panel switch is in the "ON" position.

17.2.5 DC/DC Converters

The autonomous DC/DC Converters produce the DC voltages and current required for the following units: Frame Unit Carrier Unit Station Unit. The power source is derived from a -48/-60 VDC supply.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

231 / 288

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.2.6 Output Supervision

Each output is monitored. The presence of the output is indicated by the LEDs marked "CU", "SU" and "FU".

17.2.6.1 Shutdown Sequence

All outputs are protected against overload condition, overvoltage condition and accidental short circuit. If one of these fault conditions occurs, the following sequence takes place: The output is shut down The associated LED is extinguished to indicate the fault An alarm is raised. The power supplies can remain in this state indefinitely without incurring any damage. If the cause of the fault is removed, the supply can be reactivated, either manually or remotely, by switching the relevant supply off, then back on.

17.2.6.2 Temperature Protection

The Carrier Unit +26 VDC and Station Unit +5 VDC supplies are temperature o protected. If the temperature of these parts rises above 90 C, automatic o shutdown takes place. After the temperature has fallen below 90 C, the submodule can be reactivated by switching its input power supply off and then o on. At ambient temperatures of 25 C, or less, the power supply satisfactorily supplies a nominal load, without forced cooling, for at least 15 minutes.

17.2.6.3 Alarms
If any power supply output fails, an alarm is raised. Each alarm condition is transmitted to the Station Unit via an optically isolated switch. For system security, the alarm switches are normally on. There are alarm switches to serve the Frame Unit, Carrier Unit and Station Unit supplies.

17.2.6.4 Output Decoupling

The outputs have a built-in decoupling circuit, which prevents damage to the power supply under no-load or short-circuit conditions. If the voltage exceeds minimum or maximum values, sensors monitoring the backplane +5.1 V and +12 V pins raise an alarm and shut down the power supply.

232 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.3 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the DC/DC Power Supplies. The following information is provided: LEDs Power Supply (input) Replacement FCPS Output Characteristics MBPS Output Characteristics Safety Standards Grounding Isolation.

17.3.1 LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs on the power supply units front panels. Module MBPS LED ON FU SU CU FCPS ON FU CU Description Lit when power is present. Extinguished if Frame Unit is faulty. Extinguished if Station Unit is faulty. Extinguished if Carrier Unit is faulty. Lit when power is present. Extinguished if Frame Unit is faulty. Extinguished if Carrier Unit is faulty.

Table 68: Power Supply LED Descriptions

17.3.2 Power Supply

The input voltage to the DC/DC power supply units is -48/-60 VDC. To ensure normal operation, this must not fall below -38.4 VDC.

17.3.3 Replacement
All the DC/DC power supplies are capable of hot insertion, without causing damage to the units.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

233 / 288

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.3.4 FCPS Output Characteristics

The following table shows the output voltages, tolerances and current bands supplied by the FCPS. Nominal Voltage and Tolerance +26 VDC +/- 2 % -12 VDC +/- 2 % -12 VDC +/- 2 % +5.1 VDC +/- 2 % +5.1 VDC +/- 2 % Dynamic Regulation +/- 0.65 V +/- 5 % +/- 5 % +/- 5 % +/- 5 % Ripple Voltage (20 MHz Bandwidth) < 200 mVpp < 40 mVpp < 40 mVpp < 50 mVpp < 50 mVpp Current (max) 7.0 A 2.7 A 0.8 A 2.0 A 13 A Current (min) 0.6 A 0.2 A 0.04 A 0.16 A 1.1 A

Name +26 VCU +12 VCU -12 VCU +5 VCU +5 VFU

Table 69: FCPS Output Characteristics

17.3.5 MBPS Output Characteristics

The following table shows the outputs supplied by the MBPS, in addition to those provided by the FCPS listed in the table below. Nominal Voltage and Tolerance +12 VDC +/- 2 % +5.1 VDC +/- 2 % +5.1 VDC +/- 3 % Dynamic Regulation +/- 5 % +/- 5 % +/- 5 % Ripple Voltage (20 MHz Bandwidth) < 120 mVpp < 50 mVpp < 50 mVpp Current (max) 5A 22 A 6A Current (min) 0A 0A 0A

Name +12 VSU +5 VSU +5 TC16

Table 70: Additional MBPS Output Characteristics

234 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.3.6 Safety Standards

The power supply units comply with the following applicable standards: EN 60950 EN 60215 Power supply primary and secondary circuits conform to the following: Primary circuits The inputs of the power supply units are Telecom Network Voltage (TNV) circuits according to EN 60950. Secondary circuits. The outputs of the power supply units satisfy the requirements for Safety Extra Low Voltage circuits according to EN 60950.

17.3.7 Grounding
All conductive parts are connected to ground (0 V). The 0 V line is permanently earthed with a Permanent Earth conductor.

17.3.8 Isolation
The isolation resistance, between the inputs and ground/outputs, is > 100 MOhm.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

235 / 288

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.4 Physical Description

The power supply assemblies comprise a multilayer board fixed to a front panel. A large aluminium heat sink is mounted at the center of the board to conduct heat away from high-power circuit components. Two DIN type connectors are mounted at the rear. The LEDs, fuses and switches are located on the front panel. The fuses are fitted in a recess. The fuse type and current rating is indicated on the front panel of each unit. This section describes the physical details of the MBPS and FCPS units. It provides the following information: Dimensions MBPS Front Panel MBPS Rear View FCPS Front Panel FCPS Rear View.

17.4.1 Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the MBPS and FCPS are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: MBPS: FCPS: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 15 T 9T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 76.20 mm 45.72 mm 280 mm

Table 71: MBPS/FCPS Physical Dimensions

236 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.4.2 MBPS Front Panel

The following figure shows the MBPS front panel, including the LEDs, fuses, rocker switches, equipment label and handle for easy removal and insertion.
Fixing Holes

ON FU SU CU LEDs

Fuses

FU T4A SU T10A Equipment Labels CU T10A

Handle

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

FU

SU

Rocker Switches

CU

Fixing Holes

Figure 81: MBPS Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

237 / 288

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.4.3 MBPS Rear View

A rear view of the MBPS is shown in the figure below, including the heat sink and upper and lower connectors.
Fixing Holes

Upper Connector

Heat Sink

Lower Connector

Fixing Holes

Figure 82: MBPS Rear View

238 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.4.4 FCPS Front Panel

The following figure shows the FCPS front panel, including the On/Off switches, LEDs and fuses, as well as the handle for easy removal and insertion.
Fixing Holes

ON FU CU LEDs

FU T4A CU T10A

Fuses

Equipment Labels

Handle

ON OFF ON OFF

FU Rocker Switches CU

Fixing Holes

Figure 83: FCPS Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

239 / 288

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.4.5 FCPS Rear View

The figure below shows a rear view of the FCPS, including the heat sink and upper and lower connectors.
Fixing Holes

Upper Connector

Heat Sink

Lower Connector

Fixing Holes

Figure 84: FCPS Rear View

240 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.5 Environment
The power supplies meet the requirements for environmental conditions, for their safe and efficient operation, given in ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.2. Environmental information is provided on: Climatic Conditions Mechanical Conditions.

17.5.1 Climatic Conditions

The following table lists the climatic parameters for the safe and efficient operation of the power supplies. Parameter Ambient temperature: Relative humidity: Absolute humidity: Temperature rate of change: Air stream (forced cooling): Low air pressure: High air pressure: Value -10
o

C to +70

5 % to 95 % 1 g/m 3 to 29 g/m 3 [le ]2

o

> 3 L/s 70 kPa 106 kPa

Table 72: DC/DC Power Supplies Climatic Conditions

17.5.2 Mechanical Conditions

The following table lists the mechanical parameters for the safe and efficient operation of the power supplies. Parameter Stationary vibration (sinusoidal) Displacement amplitude: Frequency range: Acceleration amplitude: Frequency range: Shock Type L, peak acceleration: Value 1.5 mm 2 to 9 Hz 5 m/ s 2 9 to 200 Hz 40 m/ s 2

Table 73: DC/DC Power Supplies Mechanical Conditions

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

241 / 288

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.6 EMC
The following sections provide information on EMC for the DC/DC Power Supplies. The following information is provided: Low frequency emissions High frequency emissions Immunity from radiated emissions.

17.6.1 Low Frequency

For conducted emission in the low frequency range, the inputs of the power supply units meet the requirements given in prETS 300 132-2, Chapter 4.8.

17.6.2 High Frequency

For conducted emission in the high frequency range, the inputs of the power supply meet the requirements given in EN 55022 Class B and ETS 300 386-1, Chapter 7.2.3. The following table lists the requirements for EN 55022 Class B. Frequency Range 0.02 - 0.15 MHz > 0.15 - 0.5 MHz > 0.5 - 5 MHz > 5 - 30 MHz Average 66 - 56 dB[mu ]V 56 dB[mu ]V 60 dB[mu ]V Quasi-peak 79 dB[mu ]V 56 - 46 dB[mu ]V 46 dB[mu ]V 50 dB[mu ]V

Table 74: DC/DC Power Supplies EN 55022 Class B Requirements

17.6.3 Immunity
For radiated emission, in the frequency range 30 MHz to 1000 MHz, the power supplies meet the requirements given in EN 55022 Class B, Table 4. For immunity to radiated emission, the power supplies meet the requirements given in prETS 300 342-2, Chapter 9.2. For immunity to electromagnetic fields, in the frequency range 80 MHz to 1000 MHz, the power supplies meet the requirements given in ENV 50140 Level 2 (3 V/m). For immunity against Electrical Fast Transient-Bursts the power supplies meet the requirements given in prETS 300 342-2, Chapter 9.4.

242 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

17 MBPS/FCPS

17.7 ESD
The DC/DC Power Supplies meet ESD requirements, detailed in the following standards: prETS 300 342-2, Chapter 9.3 IEC 801-2 (IEC 1000-4-2) Level 3.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

243 / 288

17 MBPS/FCPS

244 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

18 DCDB

18 DCDB
This chapter provides a detailed description of the DCDB.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

245 / 288

18 DCDB

18.1 Introduction
The DCDB (Direct Current Distribution Board) is used in DC-powered indoor BTSs. It provides breakers for the input supply and distributes the supply to the BTS internal power supplies.

18.1.1 Functions
The DCDB provides two functions: Manual power supply isolation for equipment maintenance purposes Detection of current overload conditions with automatic power supply isolation.

18.1.2 Components
The DCDB consists of three main components: Input connections Breakers Output connections.

18.1.3 Diagram
The following figure shows a diagram of the DCDB and typical input supply.
48/60 V 0V GND Power Cables from Filters

Breaker 4

Breaker 3

Breaker 2

Breaker 1

Figure 85: DCDB in a Mini-BTS with Two Subracks

246 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

18 DCDB

18.2 DCDB Components

The DCDB contains the following components: Input Connections Circuit Breakers Output Connections.

18.2.1 Input Connections

The DC input supply of -48/-60 VDC (nominal) is fed to the DCDB via input filters. The -48/-60 VDC supply lines are connected to the switched inputs of the breakers. Ground and 0 V input connections are made to connector groups associated with each breaker.

18.2.2 Circuit Breakers

If the load current exceeds 16 A, the circuit breaker automatically switches off the supply to the equipment it serves. (A short peak of over current does not cause it to switch off). Front panel switches also allow the power supply to be switched off manually. In all cases, the DCDB has to be switched on manually.

18.2.3 Output Connections

The -48/-60 VDC output connections are made to the switched outputs of the breakers. Ground and 0 V output connections are made to the connector groups associated with each breaker.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

247 / 288

18 DCDB

18.3 Configurations
There are various ways that the DCDB can be configured depending on the size and type of the equipment it serves.

18.3.1 Mini-BTS with Two Subracks

The figure below shows the DCDB in a Mini-BTS with two subracks configuration.

BREAKER

GND

48/60V 16A 4 3 1 F2 48/60V 1 MBSR2 2 X2 2 CFU1

0V 5 4 X6 3 2 1 MBSR2 0V/FILTER 2 CFU1

X9

5 4 II 3 2 1 MBSR2 SCREENING CFU1

FILTER 1 48/60V 16A 48/60V 1 F1 2 X1 2 1 MBSR1 4 3 CFU1 0V 5 4 X5 3 2 1 MBSR1 0V/FILTER 2 CFU1 I 5 4 3 2 1 MBSR1 SCREENING CFU1

F X

Breakers Connector names

Figure 86: DCDB in a Mini-BTS with Two Subracks

248 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

18 DCDB

18.3.2 BTS with up to Eight Carriers

The following figure shows a DCDB in a BTS with upt to eight carriers configuration.
BREAKER 16A 1 F4 2 X4 2 1 FCSR3/FCPS2 FCSR3/FCPS1 48/60V 4 3 X8 3 2 1 48/60V 48/60V 16A FILTER 2 1 F3 2 X3 2 1 FCSR2/FCPS2 FCSR2/FCPS1 4 3 X7 0V 5 4 3 2 1 FCSR2/FCPS2 FCSR2/FCPS1 0V/FILTER 3 III 5 4 3 2 1 FCSR2/FCPS2 FCSR2/FCPS1 SCREENING 0V 5 4 FCSR3/FCPS2 FCSR3/FCPS1 0V/FILTER 4 IV 3 2 1 FCSR3/FCPS2 FCSR3/FCPS1 SCREENING GND 5 4

48/60V 16A 4 3 X2 2 1 COMBINER CFU1

0V 5 4 COMBINER CFU1 FCSR1/FCPS2 MBSR2 0V/FILTER 4

X9 5 4 II 3 2 1 COMBINER CFU1 FCSR1/FCPS2 MBSR2 SCREENING

FILTER 1

1 F2

FCSR1/FCPS2 X6 3 MBSR2 2 1 0V COMBINER CFU1 FCSR1/FCPS1 MBSR1 5 4 X5 3 2 1

48/60V 16A

48/60V 4 3 1 F1 2 X1 2 1

COMBINER CFU1 FCSR1/FCPS1 MBSR1 0V/FILTER 3 I

5 4 3 2 1

COMBINER CFU1 FCSR1/FCPS1 MBSR1 SCREENING

Figure 87: DCDB in a BTS with up to Eight Carriers

Note:

If less than eight Carriers are equipped, excess cables are not connected.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

249 / 288

18 DCDB

18.3.3 Indoor Sectorized BTS with 3 x 2 Carriers

This figure shows a DCDC in an Indoor sectorized BTS with 3 x 2 carriers.

BREAKER 16A 1 F4 2

48/60V 4 3 X4 2 1 MBSR2 III MBSR1 III

0V 5 4 X8 3 2 1 MBSR2 III MBSR1 III 0V/FILTER 4

GND 5 4 IV 3 2 1 MBSR2 III MBSR1 III SCREENING

48/60V 48/60V 16A FILTER 2 1 F3 2 X3 2 1 MBSR2 II MBSR1 II 4 3 X7 0V 5 4 3 2 1 0V CFU1 2 CFU1 1 X6 MBSR2 I 5 4 3 2 1 48/60V 16A 4 3 1 F1 2 X1 2 1 MBSR1 I CFU1 2 CFU1 1 X5 3 2 1 MBSR1 I 0V/FILTER 3 0V 5 4 CFU1 2 CFU1 1 I 5 4 3 2 1 MBSR1 I SCREENING CFU1 2 CFU1 1 MBSR2 I 0V/FILTER 4 CFU1 2 CFU1 1 II 2 1 3 2 1 MBSR2 I SCREENING MBSR2 II MBSR1 II 0V/FILTER 3 III 5 4 3 2 1 X9 5 4 CFU1 2 CFU1 1 MBSR2 II MBSR1 II SCREENING

48/60V 16A X2 4 3 FILTER 1 1 F2 2

48/60V

I, II, III at MBSR designates number of BTS sectors

Figure 88: DCDB in a Sectorized Indoor BTS with 3 x 2 Carriers

250 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

18 DCDB

18.3.4 Outdoor Sectorized BTS with 3 x 2 Carriers

A DCDB in an outdoor sectorized BTS with 3 x 2 carriers is shown in the figure below.
BREAKER 16A 1 F4 2 48/60V 4 3 X4 2 1 Smoke Det* NTPM/MW* NTPM/MW* X8 3 2 1 48/60V 48/60V 16A FILTER 2 1 F3 2 4 3 X3 2 1 HEX1 0V 5 4 X7 3 2 1 48/60V 16A FILTER 1 1 F2 2 4 3 X2 2 1 MBSR2 0V 5 4 X6 II 3 2 1 48/60V 16A 1 F1 2 X1 2 1 MBSR1 I 4 3 X5 3 2 1 MBSR1 0V 0V 5 4 I 5 4 3 2 1 MBSR1 SCREENING MBSR2 0V 3 2 1 MBSR2 SCREENING HEX1 0V X9 5 4 III 5 4 3 2 1 HEX1 SCREENING 0V 5 4 Smoke Det* IV NTPM/MW* NTPM/MW* 0V 3 2 1 NTPM/MW* NTPM/MW* SCREENING GND 5 4 Smoke Det*

48/60V

I, II, III at MBSR designates number of BTS sectors MW Microwave Equipment NTPM Network Termination Primary Multiplexer

* Master BTS Only

Figure 89: DCDB in a Sectorized Outdoor BTS with 3 x 2 Carriers

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

251 / 288

18 DCDB

18.4 Physical Description

The DCDB comprises a front panel on which four Breakers are mounted. The normal switch-on position is up. The front panel is attached to a printed circuit board which accommodates a matrix of spade terminals arranged in groups. The DCDB assembly slides into a subrack guided by top and bottom rails. The front panel is fixed to the subrack frame by top and bottom screws of the front panel. This section describes the physical details of the DCDB. It provides the following information: Dimensions Appearance.

18.4.1 Dimensions
The following table shows the DCDB physical dimensions. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 6U 10 T Size (mm) 266.7 mm 50.8 mm 250.0 mm

Table 75: DCDB Physical Dimensions

252 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

18 DCDB

18.4.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the DCDB equipment assembly. It includes the Spade terminal matrix, the breakers and their input terminal, the breaker tail connections and the breaker switches on the front panel.
48/60 VDC Breaker Tail Connection VDC Spade Terminal Matrix 0 V GND Cable Fixings

Fixing Holes 4

3 Equipment Labels 2 Breaker Switches shown in Position "ON"

Breakers

Input Terminals of Breakers

Fixing Holes Front Panel

Figure 90: DCDB Equipment Assembly

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

253 / 288

18 DCDB

254 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

19 SMBI

19 SMBI
This chapter provides a detailed description of the SMBI.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

255 / 288

19 SMBI

19.1 Introduction
The BIE is used to connect distant BTSs to BSCs via a standard 2 Mbit/s (primary rate) G.703/G.704 type transmission network. This connection is known as the Abis Interface. The SMBI (Submultiplexer Base Station Interface) provides the BIE at the BTS. Its function is to multiplex traffic and signalling information between the Abis Interface and BTS BSIs and vice-versa. The following figure shows the location of the SMBI in the simplest BSS configuration.
BSI Base Station Interface Equipment BTS
Other BTS Equipment

BSI Long 2 Mbit/s Link BSC

Base Station Interface Equipment Other BSC Equipment

SMBI

Abis Interface

Figure 91: SMBI Logical Positioning Abis Interface The SMBI provides two Abis Interfaces, allowing connection of multiple BTSs to the BSC in ring or chain-type architectures. A simple star architecture can also be used, requiring just one interface. A single SMBI can handle six BSIs. These are shared between Frame Units and OMUs depending on the configuration. The SMBI also provides several service functions including BER measurement and loopback tests. In larger configurations a second SMBI is employed, providing a total of 12 BSIs. In this case, one SMBI is configured as "master" and is connected to the Abis Interface. The second, "slave" SMBI, is connected to the master, and routes its data to/from the Abis Interface through the master. The mapping of the individual traffic and signalling channels between the Abis Interface and BSIs is programmable. This is done either locally, via the MMI, or remotely via the Transmission Q1 Link. The main path through the unit is from the Abis Interface. It passes through the multiplexers, framers, PCM time slot switch, and out to the BSIs via the bit switch (and second SMBI if used). The SMBI operates in both directions, also multiplexing from the BSIs to the Abis Interface. The Microcontroller and remaining interfaces provide the O&M functions.

256 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

19 SMBI

19.2 SMBI Functions

19.2.1 Functional Blocks
The SMBI contains the following functional blocks: G.703 interface Multiplexer Central clock unit Framer/G.704 interface PCM time slot switch Bit switch Microcontroller.

Abis Interface 1 from BSC or Master SMBI

G.703 Interface

Multiplexer

Framer/G.704 Interface

BSIs

Central Clock Unit

PCM Time Slot Switch

TC Interface Bit Switch ST Interface

DCL2 Abis Interface 2 to Slave SMBI G.703 Interface Multiplexer Framer/G.704 Interface Station Unit Interface

Reset

Microcontroller

LEDs

TSST

MMI

Figure 92: SMBI Block Diagram

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

257 / 288

19 SMBI

19.2.2 G.703 Interface

The G.703 interface carries traffic and signalling information between the BSC and BTSs. It provides the connection to standard G.703 2 Mbit/s Network Terminators provided by the network link operator.

19.2.3 Multiplexer
The Multiplexer is simply a switch allowing an alternative to the Abis Interface to be selected. Although the basic hardware has been included on the SMBI, this feature is not fully implemented.

19.2.4 Central Clock Unit

The Central Clock Unit provides a reference clock. It is extracted from the Abis Interface, or locally generated, and distributed throughout the SMBI and to the BTS via the Station Unit interface.

19.2.5 Framer/G.704 Interface

The Framer provides all the functions required for conversion of the Abis data stream into PCM frames including: High Density Bipolar 3 coding Alarm Indicator Signal detection Channel 0 handling: e.g., Frame alignment, Cyclic Redundancy Check, Bit Error Rate and Alarm Bit monitoring.

19.2.6 PCM Time Slot Switch

The PCM time slot switch multiplexes the incoming/outgoing Abis Interface data on a 8-bit time slot basis to a number of input/output streams. The output is passed to the bit switch. In order to accommodate the wide range of possible connection architectures, time slot allocations are configurable, according to a restricted set of mappings.

258 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

19 SMBI

19.2.7 Bit Switch

The Bit Switch multiplexes traffic data nibbles from the PCM Time Slot Switch outputs to the BSIs. Frame Unit Signalling and O&M information is carried in channels occupying whole 8-bit time slots. Mapping
Bit TS 0 1 2 3 (TCH 0) TCH 4 TCH 0 Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 TS 0 INFO TCH 1 TCH 5 TCH 1 TCH 5 TCH 1 TCH 5 TCH 1 TCH 5 TCH 1 TCH 5 TCH 1 TCH 5 TCH 1 TCH 5 TCH 1 TCH 5 TCH 2 TCH 6 TCH 2 TCH 6 TCH 2 TCH 6 TCH 2 TCH 6 TCH 2 TCH 6 TCH 2 TCH 6 TCH 2 TCH 6 TCH 2 TCH 6 7 8 TS Frame Unit No. 1 Frame Unit No. 5 Frame Unit No. 2 Frame Unit No. 6 Frame Unit No. 3 Frame Unit No. 7 Frame Unit No. 4 Frame Unit No. 8 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 FRAME UNIT SIGNALLING NOT USED / ALL ONES NOT USED / ALL ONES NOT USED / ALL ONES NOT USED / ALL ONES NOT USED / ALL ONES NOT USED / ALL ONES NOT USED / ALL ONES NOT USED / ALL ONES NOT USED / ALL ONES NOT USED / ALL ONES ALL ONES ALL ONES ALL ONES ALL ONES BSI Frame (for Frame Unit 3) TCH7 TCH6 TCH5 TCH4 TCH3 NOT USED ALL ONES TCH2 TCH1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NOT USED / ALL ONES

TCH 3 TCH 7 TCH 3 TCH 7 TCH 3 TCH 7 TCH 3 TCH 7 TCH 3 TCH 7 TCH 3 TCH 7 TCH 3 TCH 7 TCH 3 TCH 7

TCH0

4 TCH 4 5 TCH 0 6 TCH 4 7 TCH 0 8 TCH 4 9 TCH 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Q1 TCH 4 TCH 0 TCH 4 TCH 0 TCH 4 TCH 0 TCH 4

NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED BTS O&M CHANNEL 2 FRAME UNIT 9 SIGNALLING FRAME UNIT 8 SIGNALLING FRAME UNIT 7 SIGNALLING FRAME UNIT 6 SIGNALLING FRAME UNIT 5 SIGNALLING FRAME UNIT 4 SIGNALLING FRAME UNIT 3 SIGNALLING FRAME UNIT 2 SIGNALLING FRAME UNIT 1 SIGNALLING BTS O&M CHANNEL 1 Abis Interface Frame

Figure 93: Typical Abis Interface to BSI Mapping at a BTS

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

259 / 288

19 SMBI

19.2.8 Microcontroller
The microcontroller provides the following functions: Configuration Monitoring of the SMBI and Abis Interface O&M processing. These functions are based around a highly integrated 16-bit microcontroller. An EEPROM holds configuration settings including equipment addresses, Abis Interface to BSI mappings and the connection architecture. Access to the controller can be gained locally via the MMI or remotely through the Abis Interface. A watchdog circuit protects the microcontroller from hang-up behavior.

19.3 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the SMBI. The following information is provided: LEDs Replacement Power Supply DIP Switch Abis Interface Characteristics.

260 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

19 SMBI

19.3.1 LEDs
Status LEDs on the front panel indicate the status of the Abis Interface. The function of the LEDs in a ring configuration is shown in the following table. LED A1 and A2 off: A1/A2 on: A1/A2 blinking slowly: A1/A2 blinking fast: Meaning No power. No Failure on Abis 1/Abis 2 Hardware. Failure of Abis 1/Abis 2 Hardware. Severe SMBI Failure.

Table 76: LEDs A1/A2 on SMBI in Ring Configuration In a star configuration or at the end of a chain, A2 is disabled. The function of LED A1 in this configuration is shown in the following table. LEDs A1 off: A1 on: A1 blinking slowly: A1 blinking fast: Meaning No power. No Failure on Abis 1 Hardware. Failure of Abis 1 Hardware. Severe SMBI Failure.

Table 77: LED A1 on SMBI in Star Configuration or End of Chain If a second SMBI is used, only A1 is used on the slave board. The function of LED A1 in this configuration is shown in the following table. LEDs A1 off: A1 on: A1 blinking fast: Meaning No power Power on Severe Failure (on second SMBI)

Table 78: LED A1 on Second SMBI

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

261 / 288

19 SMBI

19.3.2 Replacement
Removal and insertion of the SMBI, while power is present on the backplane, can result in damage to the unit. Risk of Damage to Equipment Hot replacement of the SMBI is not permitted.

19.3.3 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the SMBI via the backplane connectors: +5 VDC, 1.3 A max. +12 VDC, 30 mA max.

19.3.4 DIP Switch

The impedance of the two Abis Interfaces can be independently configured using a DIP switch located on the board. The following figure shows the switch positions, which can be set.
Both Interfaces = 120 Ohms 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Both Interfaces = 75 Ohms

Abis 1 Abis 2

Abis 1 Abis 2 Abis 1 = 75 Ohms Abis 2 = 120 Ohms

Abis 1 = 120 Ohms Abis 2 = 75 Ohms 1 2 3 4

Abis 1 Abis 2

Abis 1 Abis 2

Figure 94: Abis Interface Impedance Switch Settings

Note:

Switches 2 and 4 must not be moved from their lower positions.

262 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

19 SMBI

19.3.5 Abis Interface Characteristics

The Abis Interface provides the connection to standard G.703 2 Mbit/s Network Terminators provided by the network link operator. The following table lists the Abis Interface characteristics. Characteristic Signal interface: Bit rate: Impedance: Input sensitivity: Interface signals: Meaning G.703 2048 kbit/s 120 Ohm (galvanic isolated) or 75 Ohm. -40 dB (max). RLSC, RLSS - receive data. TLSC, TLSS - transmit data. Table 79: Abis Interface Characteristics

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

263 / 288

19 SMBI

19.4 Physical Description

The SMBI is a multilayer board, which plugs into the 19" BTS subrack. This section describes the physical details of the SMBI. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front Panel Connections Rear View.

19.4.1 Dimensions
The SMBI has the following dimensions shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 3U 5T Size (mm) 133.35 mm 25.4 mm 280 mm

Table 80: SMBI Physical Dimensions

264 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

19 SMBI

19.4.2 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the SMBI, including the Abis Interface connector and status LEDs.
Fixing Hole

A2 A1

Equipment Labels

Alarm LEDs

Abis 2 Connector Abis 1 Connector TSST Connector 1 MMI Connector Reset Button

Handle

Fixing Hole

Figure 95: SMBI Front Panel

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

265 / 288

19 SMBI

19.4.3 Connections
The two Abis Interfaces share the 45 pin, 3-row male socket on the front panel with the MMI and TSST connections. The following table lists the front panel connector pin-outs. Pin 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Row a NC GND GND NC NC GND GND NC RTSSTT (unused) RTSSTF (unused) NC NC NC NC RMMI Row b NC GND TLSS2 NC NC GND TLSS1 NC GND Row c RLSC2 RLSS2 TLSC2 NC RLSC1 RLSS1 TLSC1 NC TTSSTT (unused) TTSSTF (unused) STSST (unused) NC MFRMCON SMMI TMMI 3*3 MMI 3*3 TSST (unused) 3*3 Abis1 3*3 Abis2

NC

5 4 3 2 1

GND NC GND GND GND

Table 81: SMBI Front Panel Connector NC = Not Connected

266 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

19 SMBI

19.4.4 Rear View

The following figure shows a rear view of the SMBI, including its connectors.
Fixing Hole

DCBA

Rear Connector

32

Fixing Hole

Figure 96: SMBI Rear View

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

267 / 288

19 SMBI

268 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT
This chapter provides a detailed description of the cooling fans.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

269 / 288

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

20.1 Introduction
Cooling Fans are used in all BTS configurations to regulate the BTS internal temperature.

20.1.1 Types
Three types of Cooling Fan are used, depending on the BTS configuration: CFU1 CFUT CFUA. The following table describes the application of the three cooling fan types. Fan Type CFU1 Application Used in all BTSs Where a large flow of air is required, an additional CFU1 can be used. CFUT CFUA Used at the top of large BTS cabinets. Used in MCI2 cabinets supplied with AC power to improve forced cooling of the ADPS (version 3BK 01917 ABBA).

Table 82: Cooling Fan Types

Note:

A BTS cannot be equipped with a CFUT and a CFUA.

270 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

20.1.2 Temperature Sensor

A Temperature Sensor Board is mounted on top of the uppermost subrack within the cabinet.

20.1.3 Typical Positioning

The following figure shows typical positioning of a CFU1, CFUT, CFUA and temperature sensor relative to the equipment subracks.
CFUT Temperature Sensor Board Subrack 2

Subrack 1

ACDC Power Supply

Temperature Sensor Board Subrack 2

CFUA

Subrack 3 Control CFU1 Control Control

Subrack 1 Control CFU1

Figure 97: CFU1, CFUT, CFUA and Temperature Sensor Positioning The following figure shows a combined CFU1, CFUT/CFUA and temperature sensor block diagram.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

271 / 288

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

CFUA/CFUT

Fans

Speed Sensors

Remote Tem perature Sensors

CFU1
DC/DC Converter

48/60 VDC

Control Board

Station Unit

Fans

Speed Sensors

LEDs CFU1

LEDs CFUT/ CFUA

Figure 98: CFU1 and CFUT/CFUA Block Diagram

272 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

20.2 Functional Components

The Cooling Fan Units contain the following functional components: Fans and speed sensors DC/DC Converters Control Board.

20.2.1 Fans and Speed Sensors

The CFU1 and CFUT each contain six fans with speed sensors. The CFUA contains two fans with speed sensors. The CFU1 controls the speed of all fans.

20.2.2 DC/DC Converters

The CFU1 DC/DC Converter provides +5 VDC and +40 VDC supplies for the Fans and Control Board. This includes the supply to the CFUT/CFUA, if they are used.

20.2.3 Control Board

The Control Board uses signals from the speed and temperature sensors to control the speed of the fans as follows: At temperatures below 27 At temperatures above 55
o o

C the fans run at a fixed low speed C they run at maximum speed
o

At temperatures between 27 linearly controlled.

C and 55

C the speed of the fan units is

Alarms The Control Board also reports up to five alarm conditions to the Station Unit. The following table describes the Control Board alarms and the corresponding fault indication. Alarm Normal Alarm Fault One fan of the CFU1 or CFUT/CFUA is faulty. More than one fan is faulty. Temperature exceeds 70 C or the sensor connections faulty. The DC/DC Converter is faulty. The input supply cable is damaged or the DC/DC Converter is faulty.
o

Indication Red LED blinks

Urgent Alarm Temperature Alarm

Red LED blinks Red LED on

NALA and UALA NALA, UALA and TALA

All LEDs are off All LEDs are off

Table 83: Control Board Alarms

Note:

NALA and UALA are duplicated to serve the CFUT/CFUA (when fitted).

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

273 / 288

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

20.3 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the cooling fans. The following information is provided: LEDs Power Supply.

20.3.1 LEDs
Front panel LEDs indicate normal operation (green LEDs) or an alarm condition (red LEDs) for both the CFU1 and CFUT/CFUA.

20.3.2 Power Supply

Power is supplied to the cooling fans via the CFU1 DC/DC converter. The input supply voltage to the CFU1 is -48/-60 VDC (nominal).

20.4 CFU1 Physical Description

The CFU1 assembly contains the six fans and control board. On the top and underside of the assembly a guard grid is fitted over each fan for protection. A front panel contains the status indication LEDs. On the rear section the interface connectors and the DC/DC Converter with heat sink are mounted.

20.4.1 Dimensions
The CFU1 physical dimensions are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 1U Size (mm) 44.45 mm 480 mm 338 mm

Table 84: CFU1 Physical Dimensions

274 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

20.4.2 Appearance
The physical appearance of the CFU1 is shown in the figure below. The figure shows the front panel with the indication LEDs, a top view showing the fans and a rear view showing the connectors.
Front Panel View 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 CFUT FAULT ON Equipment Labels Top View Fans Heat Sink LEDs CFU1 ON FAULT Fixing Holes Fixing Holes

Guard Grid Fitted on Top and Underside of all Fans

Control Board

Mode Switching Strap

CFU1 Rear View

13 9

Station Unit

Temperature CFUT/ Sensor CFUA DIN Connector

Power Supply Connectors

Figure 99: CFU1 Mechanical Assembly

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

275 / 288

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

20.5 CFUT Physical Description

The CFUT casing is similar to the CFU1. However, a top panel is included which is perforated to provide air outlets.

20.5.1 Dimensions
The CFUT physical dimensions are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Size (Units) 1U Size (mm) 44.45 mm 415 mm 270 mm

Table 85: CFUT Physical Dimensions

276 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

20.5.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the rear, top and bottom views of the CFUT.
Rear View

One Meter Connecting Cable and Interface Connector DIN 3x7 Female

Bottom View

Fixing Holes

Guard Grid Fitted under all Fans

Seal Fitted all Round

Top View

Perforated Apertures

Ground Connector

Equipment Labels

Fixing Holes

Figure 100: CFUT Mechanical Assembly

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

277 / 288

20 CFU1/CFUA/CFUT

20.6 CFUA Physical Description

The CFUA comprises a printed circuit board on which two fans and the speed sensors are mounted. The CFUA is mounted in the bottom of the upper Mini-BTS Subrack.

20.6.1 Dimensions
The CFUA dimensions are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Table 86: CFUA Physical Dimensions Size (mm) 22 mm 43 mm 279 mm

20.6.2 Appearance
The CFUA mechanical assembly is shown in the figure below. It includes both top and side views.
Fixing Bolt Rear Top View Fan Fan Equipment Labels

Fixing Screw Front

Cable

Connector

Fixing Bolt Rear

Side View Fan Fan

Fixing Screw Front Fixing Nut

Figure 101: CFUA Mechanical Assembly

278 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

21 MCIB

21 MCIB
This chapter provides a detailed description of the MCIB.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

279 / 288

21 MCIB

21.1 Introduction
The MCIB is mounted in the side of the Mini-BTS MCI2 cabinet to attach the external power and signal cables. It can be used in both AC and DC powered BTSs. The following sections provide O&M information and a physical description of the MCIB.

21.2 O&M
This section describes the O&M functions of the MCIB. The following information is provided: External Alarm Cables Q1 Test Cable Jumper Connections.

21.2.1 External Alarm Cables

The pre-equipped cabling and jumper field connect the external alarm lines to the Station Unit alarm inputs and provide access for factory tests. There are three cables: External Alarm Cable 4 Door Alarm Cable 1 External Alarm Cables 2 and 3. External alarms enter the cabinet via External Alarm Cable 4 (EAC4). The "free-end" of this cable is mounted on the MCIB external connection plate, the "fixed-end" being directly connected to the inputs of the jumper field. Door Alarm Cable 1 (DAC1) connects the optional Mini-BTS Door Switch to the jumper field. The DAC1 is connected directly to the MDSW and the jumper field. External Alarm Cable 2 and External Alarm Cable 3 are directly connected to the outputs of the jumper field. The free-ends connect to the front panel alarm inputs on the Station Unit boards: EAC2 connects to the SCFE, EAC3 to the SACE.

21.2.2 Q1 Test Cable

The Q1 Test Cable is pre-mounted on the connection plate, the "free-end" being connected to the SCFE via the subrack.

21.2.3 Jumper Connections

The insertion of a plug in the jumper field disconnects the link at that point, providing a limited alarm selection mechanism. A jumper must be inserted at one of two positions to select between the internal and external door alarms: Jumper X1, pos. 2 plugged = Enable internal door alarm Jumper X2, pos. 7 plugged = Enable external door alarm.

280 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

21 MCIB

21.3 Physical Description

The MCIB consists of a stainless steel open box, with punched holes for the various signal cable connectors. Mounting holes are spaced around the outer edge. A blanking plate covers the power supply connection. This section describes the physical details of the MCIB. It provides the following information: Dimensions Front and Side View Rear View Cables.

21.3.1 Dimensions
The dimensions of the MCIB are shown in the following table. Dimension Height: Width: Depth: Table 87: MCIB Physical Dimensions Size 180 mm 240 mm 35 mm

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

281 / 288

21 MCIB

21.3.2 Front and Side View

The following figure shows the front view of the MCIB (as seen from the outside of the MCI2), and a side view.
Side View SubD Type Connector Holes Front View Equipment Labels Mounting Holes

Clock N

Clock R

Clock N

Clock R

NOMINAL INPUT Voltage: xxx Current: xxx

Input Supply Label

0V Abis Link A Abis Link B Q1Test

xx/xxV

Power Supply Cover Plate High Voltage Warning Label Power Cable Clip

Ext Alarm

Figure 102: MCIB Front and Side Views

282 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

21 MCIB

21.3.3 Rear View

The following figure shows the rear view of the MCIB (as seen from inside the MCI2), including the position of the filter unit, internal cables and jumper field.
Internal Cables DB6C for (DC) or ACPC for (AC) Internal Power Cable

#1 or #2 Power Supply Filter

#1 or #2

#1 or #2

#1 or #2

#8 Cover Plate & Warning Label

# # 7 6

#3 or #4

#3 or #4

# 5

#9

X2 8 X1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Power Input Cable #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 Master MiniBTS Clock Cable Slave MiniBTS Clock Cable Internal MiniBTS 2 Mbit Cable (120 Ohms) Internal MiniBTS 2 Mbit Cable (75 Ohms) Door Alarm Cable 1 EAC3 EAC2

External alarm connection jumper field with preequipped external alarm cables

#8 #9 DB6C ACPC X1, X2

Q1 Test Cable EAC4 DC Power Cable AC Power Cable Jumpers

Figure 103: Equipped MCIB Rear View Inside the MCI2

21.3.4 Cables
The clock and Abis Interface and Q1 Test connector (Sub-D type) are mounted on the MCIB from the inside. The pins are accessible from the outside of the cabinet, to which the external signal cables are connected. Pre-equipped cabling is used for the connection of external alarms and the Q1 Test interface. A jumper field allows the selection of an internal or external door alarm, or the alteration of alarm connection mappings (although the latter is normally performed by software). The external power cable is fixed to the cabinet by a cable clip. The AC or DC filter unit (which is a component of the internal cable set) is mounted on the MCIB from the rear.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

283 / 288

21 MCIB

284 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

22 CUDP/FUDP

22 CUDP/FUDP
This chapter gives a detailed description of the CUDP and FUDP for G2 BTS subracks.

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

285 / 288

22 CUDP/FUDP

22.1 Introduction
Dummy panels are used to replace Frame Units and Carrier Units when a slot is left vacant in certain BTS subrack configurations. There are two types of dummy panel: CUDP FUDP In appearance, their front panels are different in size and there are variations on the backplane connectors.

22.2 CUDP Physical Description

This section describes the physical details of the CUDP. It provides the following information: Front Panel Side View (showing the backplane connectors). The CUDP consists of a single board with a front panel and backplane connector(s). The CUDP has one backplane connector. The signals, presented to the connectors, are terminated with resistors.
Fixing Holes Handle

X100 Backplane Connector

Equipment Labels

Handle Fixing Holes Front Panel Side View

Figure 104: CUDP Front Panel and Backplane Connector

286 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

22 CUDP/FUDP

22.3 FUDP Physical Description

This section describes the physical details of the FUDP. It provides the following information: Front Panel Side View (showing the backplane connectors). The FUDP consists of a single board with a front panel and backplane connector(s). The FUDP has two backplane connectors. The signals, presented to the connectors, are terminated with resistors.
Fixing Holes Handle

X100

Equipment Labels Backplane Connectors

X101

Handle Front Panel Fixing Holes Side View

Figure 105: FUDP Front Panel and Backplane Connectors

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03

287 / 288

22 CUDP/FUDP

22.4 Configurations
The FUDP and CUDP are used in the following subrack configurations: MBSR2s, housed in single-carrier MCI2s, with Station Unit redundancy MBSR2s, housed in single-carrier Mini-BTS Cabinet Outdoor Two Subracks, with Station Unit redundancy MBSR2s, housed in single-carrier Mini-BTS Cabinet Outdoor Four Subracks, with Station Unit redundancy MBSR2s, housed in single-carrier Cabinet Equipment 1.2 m, with Station Unit redundancy MBSR2s, housed in 3 x 1 sectorized Cabinet Equipment 2 m, with Station Unit redundancy FCSRs housed in CBE2s. Each configuration requires a particular type of Dummy Panel. The table below lists the Dummy Panels, and their part numbers, used for the above configurations.

22.5 Applications
There are two types of FUDP, which replace the following Frame Units: Three-board Frame Unit (FUCO, FICE and DADE) Single-board Frame Units (DRFU). There are three types of CUDP, which replace the Carrier Unit. The following table lists the five types of Dummy Panel and their individual applications. Unit CUDP CUDP CUDP FUDP FUDP Part No. 3BK 06170 AA 3BK 06170 AB 3BK 06170 AC 3BK 06174 AA 3BK 06174 AB Application Replaces Carrier Unit in MBSR2. Replaces Carrier Unit in FCSR AA. Replaces Carrier Unit in FCSR AB. Replaces three-board Frame Unit in CBE2 racks. Replaces single-board Frame Units (DRFU) in CBE2s and MBSR2s.

Table 88: Types of Dummy Panel

288 / 288

3BK 21248 AAAA TQZZA Ed.03